JP7502818B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines (pinball gaming machines) and slot machines (reel-type gaming machines).

Conventionally, gaming machines are known that perform a variable display of identification information, and when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result, the machine is controlled to enter a special game state that is advantageous to the player. Some gaming machines of this type perform a pre-determination of the variable pattern and display result of the variable display of the identification information, and perform a presentation based on the result of the pre-determination. Presentation based on the result of the pre-determination is generally executed as a presentation that foretells (suggests) the future development of the game, such as the possibility that the display result of the variable display will become a specific display result or the possibility of transitioning to a special game state (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2015-62623 A

In recent years, there has been a trend toward an increase in the number and variety of effects installed in each machine. However, as the number and variety of effects increases, the effects can become more complicated and difficult for players to understand, and if the effects are not implemented appropriately, there is a risk that interest in the game will decrease.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

To solve the above problems, the present invention adopts the following measures.

The gaming machine according to the first embodiment includes:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to a special gaming state that is advantageous to a player,
A special game determination means capable of determining whether or not to control to the special game state;
A variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display of identification information;
An acquisition means capable of acquiring variation pattern determination information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A storage means capable of storing the variation pattern determination information acquired by the acquisition means as reserved information;
a variation pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern of the variation display from among a plurality of predetermined variation patterns based on a result of the determination by the special game determining means, the number of stored reserved information when the variation display is started, variation pattern determining information acquired by the acquiring means, and predetermined judgment information when the variation display is started;
A determination means capable of determining a variation pattern of the variation display before the determination by the variation pattern determination means;
a performance execution means for executing a predetermined performance based on a result of the determination by the determination means;
A variation mode setting means for setting a predetermined variation mode as the variation mode when the variation display is executed;
A display means having a display screen,
The predetermined determination information includes determination information corresponding to a specific variation pattern among the plurality of variation patterns, and determination information corresponding to a non-specific variation pattern different from the specific variation pattern among the plurality of variation patterns,
The determination information corresponding to the specific variation pattern is specific determination information that is the same regardless of the number of reserved information stored when the variation display is started,
The determination information corresponding to the non-specific variation pattern is determination information that differs depending on the number of stored pending information when the variation display is started,
The determination means is capable of determining whether the variation pattern of the variation display becomes the specific variation pattern by determining whether the variation pattern determination information acquired by the acquisition means matches the specific determination information,
The non-specific variation pattern includes a variation pattern in which a variation time from the start to the end of the variation display is shorter than that of the specific variation pattern,
The display screen is provided with a memory display section capable of displaying a memory display corresponding to the hold information stored in the storage means, and a variable memory display section capable of displaying a variable memory display corresponding to the variable display being executed,
When the predetermined variation mode is set and the determination means determines that the specific variation pattern is to be set, the performance execution means is capable of executing a specific performance as the predetermined performance based on a specific performance pattern different from the variation pattern of the variation display from before the start of the target variation display that is the subject of the determination to a predetermined period of time after the start of the target variation display that is the subject of the determination ,
The specific performance is executed by displaying a specific performance image based on the specific performance pattern on the display screen, and before the start of the target change display, while a memory display corresponding to the pending information corresponding to the target change display is displayed on the memory display unit, the specific performance image is displayed in a manner suggesting the storage of the pending information whose change pattern becomes the specific change pattern, and when a change memory display corresponding to the target change display is displayed on the change memory display unit with the start of the target change display , the specific performance image is displayed in a manner suggesting the consumption of the pending information whose change pattern becomes the specific change pattern.

According to such a gaming machine, in a predetermined variation mode, when the variation pattern of the variation display is determined to be a specific variation pattern in the judgment by the judgment means performed before the determination of the variation pattern by the variation pattern determination means (determination of the variation pattern when the variation display is started), the specific performance is configured to be executable based on a specific performance pattern different from the variation pattern of the variation display from before the start of the target variation display that is the subject of the judgment to a predetermined time after the start of the target variation display that is the subject of the judgment. The variation pattern that is determined when the variation display is started is determined based on the result of the determination by the special game determination means, the number of reserved information stored when the variation display is started (so-called "reserved number"), the variation pattern determination information acquired by the acquisition means, and the predetermined judgment information. The judgment information used in the determination includes judgment information corresponding to the specific variation pattern and judgment information corresponding to a non-specific variation pattern different from the specific variation pattern. The judgment information corresponding to the specific variation pattern is specific judgment information that is the same regardless of the reserved number when the variation display is started, and the judgment information corresponding to the non-specific variation pattern is judgment information that differs depending on the reserved number when the variation display is started. Therefore, in the predetermined variation mode, it is possible to prevent inconsistency between the specific performance executed for the specific variation pattern and the variation pattern (specific variation pattern) determined at the time of the start of the variation. In addition, adjustment according to the number of reserved items is possible for the non-specific variation pattern.

Furthermore, the non-specific variation pattern includes a variation pattern in which the variation time from the start to the end of the variation display is shorter than that of the specific variation pattern. This makes it possible to improve the efficiency of the variation display. The specific performance is executed by displaying a specific performance image based on the specific performance pattern on the display screen, and is executed by displaying a specific performance image in a manner suggesting the storage of the reserved information in which the variation pattern of the variation display is the specific variation pattern while a memory display corresponding to the reserved information corresponding to the target variation display is displayed in the memory display section before the start of the target variation display, and when a variation memory display corresponding to the target variation display is displayed in the variation memory display section with the start of the target variation display, the specific performance image is displayed in a manner suggesting the consumption of the reserved information in which the variation pattern of the variation display is the specific variation pattern. This specific performance makes it possible to draw the player's attention to the storage and consumption of the reserved information, and effectively stimulate the player's sense of expectation.

As a result of the above, the gaming machine of means 1 can optimally present the changing display of the identification information, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

The gaming machine of the second means is the gaming machine of the first means described above,
The gist of the invention is that when the specified variation mode is set, the execution of the specific performance is restricted by storing the pending information in which the variation pattern of the variation display becomes the non-specific variation pattern.

According to such a gaming machine, the execution of a specific effect is restricted by storing pending information (i.e., fluctuation pattern determination information) in which the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display determined by the fluctuation pattern determination means is a non-specific fluctuation pattern. This makes it possible to foster a sense of expectation and trust in the specific effect when the specific effect is executed. This makes it possible to further enhance the effect of the effect.

The gaming machine of the third means is the gaming machine of the first or second means described above,
The results of the determination by the special game determination means include a first result of controlling the game to the special game state and a second result of not controlling the game to the special game state;
The gist of the invention is that the specific variation pattern and the non-specific variation pattern are variation patterns that are determined when the result of the determination by the special game determination means is the second result.

With such a gaming machine, the specific variation pattern and the non-specific variation pattern are variation patterns that are determined when the machine is not controlled to the special gaming state. This makes it possible to appropriately present a variation display that does not trigger control to the special gaming state. This makes it possible to enhance the presentation effect when the machine is not controlled to the special gaming state.

According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

1 is a front view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a rear view of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention. FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the configuration of a game board according to an embodiment of the present invention. 4 is an enlarged view of the main display shown in FIG. 3, showing displays provided in the gaming machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the gaming machine. FIG. This is a table showing the correspondence between the type of jackpot and the opening pattern of the jackpot opening. 13 is a table showing various random numbers acquired by the game control microcomputer. (A) is a jackpot determination table, (B) is a jackpot type determination table, (C) is a normal pattern hit determination table, and (D) is a normal pattern change pattern selection table. This is an example of a fluctuation pattern table for a non-time-saving state. 13 is an example of a fluctuation pattern table for a time-saving state. 13 is a flowchart of a main control process. 13 is a flowchart of a main interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. This is a flowchart of the processing at the time of starting the ball entry. 13 is a flowchart of a general operation process. 13 is a flowchart of normal symbol waiting processing. This is a flowchart of the normal pattern correctness determination process. 13 is a flowchart of normal pattern random number shift processing. This is a flowchart of processing during normal pattern change. 13 is a flowchart of the normal symbol determination process. 13 is a flowchart of normal electric device processing. 13 is a flowchart of special chart operation processing. 13 is a flowchart of a special symbol waiting process. This is a flowchart of the special chart 2 correct/incorrect determination process. This is a flowchart of the special chart 2 variation pattern selection process. This is a flowchart of the special chart 2 variation pattern selection process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of random number shift processing. This is a flowchart of the special chart 1 correct/incorrect determination process. This is a flowchart of the special chart 1 variation pattern selection process. This is a flowchart of the special chart 1 variation pattern selection process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of random number shift processing. This is a flowchart of processing during special pattern change. 13 is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. This is a flowchart for processing special electric devices (jackpot play). 13 is a flowchart of a game status setting process. This is a flowchart for processing the number of reserved balls. 13 is a flowchart of a power interruption monitoring process. 13 is a flowchart of a sub-control main process. 13 is a flowchart of a reception interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart of a 2 ms timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart of a 10 ms timer interrupt process. 13 is a flowchart of a received command analysis process. 13 is a flowchart of the variable performance start processing. 13 is a flowchart of the pending icon notification process. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing the movable performance member in a non-operated state (standby state), and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the movable performance member in an operated state. A diagram showing the configuration of a performance hold information storage area. 13 is a flowchart of a special zone effect processing. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a special zone presentation. A figure showing an example of a special zone excitement performance. 13 is a flowchart of a standby effect process. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a standby effect. 13 is a flowchart of a win/lose branch flag monitoring process. A figure showing an example of a winning/losing branching presentation.

Next, an embodiment of the present invention will be described using an example. In the following, an example will be described in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (pinball game machine) in which the game medium used in the game is a game ball, and the game can be progressed by firing the game ball toward the game board (game area).

In the following description, the term "front" simply refers to the front side (near side) when the gaming machine is viewed from the front, and refers to the side where the player is positioned when playing. The term "rear" simply refers to the back side (rear side) when the gaming machine is viewed from the front. Furthermore, the terms "upper side," "lower side," "left side," and "right side" simply refer to the top, bottom, left, and right directions when the gaming machine is viewed from the front, and refer to the top, bottom, left, and right directions in Figures 1 and 3, for example.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is a so-called "digital pachinko type" pachinko gaming machine that plays a pattern-changing game (also simply called "variable game") in which a special pattern is displayed in a variable manner based on the entry of a gaming ball into the starting hole (also called "starting ball entry"), and when a jackpot pattern is displayed (stopped) as a result of the variable game, a jackpot game (special game) can be played in which a predetermined gaming value (for example, prize balls) is awarded to the player.

[Basic configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1]
As shown in Figures 1 to 3, the pachinko machine 1 comprises a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2 attached within the game machine frame 50. The game board 2 is configured to be detachable from the game machine frame 50. Figure 3 shows the game board 2 removed from the game machine frame 50.

The gaming machine frame 50 is composed of a front frame 51 with a decorative surface, a main frame 52 to which the gaming board 2 and the like are attached, and an outer frame 53 for mounting the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the island equipment of the hall. The front frame 51, main frame 52, and outer frame 53 are each pivoted at one end and are each configured to be able to be opened and closed.

The front frame 51 is provided with a launch handle 60 for launching game balls with a launch strength according to the amount of operation (rotation angle) by the player, a ball supply tray (upper tray) 61 capable of storing game balls and supplying the stored game balls to the launching device, and a surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 62 capable of storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the ball supply tray 61.

The front frame 51 is also provided with a first effect button 63a and a second effect button 63b that can be operated by the player during game effects that are executed as the game progresses, a decorative frame lamp 66 that can emit various lights depending on the game situation, and a speaker 67 that can output various sounds depending on the game situation. Either or both of the first effect button 63a and the second effect button 63b are also referred to as the "effect button 63".

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with speakers 67, an upper left speaker 67L provided at the upper left of the front frame 51, and an upper right speaker 67R provided at the upper right of the front frame 51. The pair of left and right speakers 67L, 67R can output stereo sound. Of course, it is also possible to output not only stereo sound but also monaural sound.

The effect button 63 functions as an input means used by the player when making an input, and also functions as an operation means that can be operated by the player. The player can use (operate) the effect button (the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b) depending on the game situation and the type of game effect being executed. For example, when the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b is operated during the execution of a game effect, a predetermined operation corresponding effect is performed based on the operation. In this embodiment, the first effect button 63a (also referred to as the "first input means" or "first operation means") is provided on the top surface (top surface) of the upper tray 61 of the front frame 51, and the second effect button 63b (also referred to as the "second input means" or "second operation means") is provided on the left front surface of the lower tray 62.

The first effect button 63a is configured as a movable operating means that can be operated in a predetermined operating mode. In this embodiment, the operating mode is vibration. The vibration of the first effect button 63a can be achieved, for example, by configuring the first effect button 63a as an effect button unit (effect button device) that includes an eccentric motor (vibration motor) and driving the eccentric motor. The first effect button 63a that is configured to be operable (vibrate) in this way functions as a movable part for effect (also called a "movable effect part") that is operably provided on the front side (front component) of the pachinko game machine 1.

The operating mode of the first effect button 63a is not limited to vibration, and may be, for example, an upward protrusion or rotation, or may be operable in an operating mode selected from a plurality of operating modes such as vibration, protrusion, and rotation based on the effect pattern. The second effect button 63b may also be configured to be operable in a predetermined operating mode.

The configuration of the effect button 63 is not limited to the embodiment described herein, and it is sufficient if it is something that allows the player to make an input. For example, it may be a lever-type input means (operation means), a contact-type input means (e.g., a retractable type, touch sensor type, etc.) in which the player makes an input by directly contacting the button portion, or a non-contact-type input means (e.g., a photoelectric type, etc.) in which input is made by detecting the proximity of a part of the player's body.

A game area 3, in which game balls launched by operating the launch handle 60 flow down, is formed on the game board 2 and is surrounded by a rail member 4. The game board 2 (game area 3) can be seen from the front side (player side) of the pachinko game machine 1 through a window (viewing window) provided in the front frame 51 (see Figure 1).

The play area 3 has a number of protruding play nails 16 that guide the play balls, and a ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the end of the rail member 4. The ball return prevention piece 6 is intended to prevent the play balls that have been guided into the play area from returning to the launching device. The play board 2 also has decorative board lamps 5 (see Figure 5) that can emit various lights depending on the play situation.

Near the center of the game board 2 (within the game area) is provided an image display device 7 having a display screen 7a (display section) capable of displaying various images (display objects). The image display device 7 is equipped with a liquid crystal display (liquid crystal display), and is provided on the back side of the game board 2 so that the display screen 7a (display section) can be seen from the front through an opening provided in approximately the center of the game board 2 (game area 3).

The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is provided with a performance pattern display area 7b (also referred to as the "performance pattern display section") in which a performance pattern 8 (one aspect of a display object) is displayed. The performance pattern 8 is composed of three patterns, a left performance pattern 8L, a center performance pattern 8C, and a right performance pattern 8R, and changes and displays in synchronization with the changing display of the special pattern described below, and a stationary display in synchronization with the stationary display of the special pattern. Examples of the changing display include a scrolling display up and down, left and right, diagonally, etc. Any or all of the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are also simply referred to as "performance pattern 8".

The performance pattern display area 7b consists of three pattern display areas, "left," "center," and "right," with the left pattern display area displaying the left performance pattern 8L, the center pattern display area displaying the center performance pattern 8C, and the right pattern display area displaying the right performance pattern 8R. Note that the left, center, and right pattern display areas do not need to be positioned separately, and the left, center, and right performance pattern display areas may each be the entire pattern display area (performance pattern display area 7b).

In this embodiment, the performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R each consist of a number pattern (identification information type, pattern type) from "1" to "9," and these number patterns are displayed in order. Specifically, the changing display of the performance pattern 8 is performed by scrolling the performance patterns in the order of "1" → "2" ... "8" → "9" (ascending order), and when it reaches "9," it returns to "1," and the scrolling display is repeated until the change ends (stops).

In this embodiment, each of the symbols "1" to "9" that make up the performance symbol 8 contains color information, and each symbol can be classified by color. Specifically, the odd symbols "3" and "7" are red symbols (hereinafter also referred to as "red symbols"), and the other odd symbols "1", "5", and "9" are green symbols (hereinafter also referred to as "green symbols"). In addition, the even symbols "2", "4", "6", and "8" are blue symbols (hereinafter also referred to as "blue symbols").

Depending on the combination (stop display mode) of the left, center, and right performance patterns displayed (stop display) in the performance pattern display area 7b, the result of the variable display of the first special pattern displayed on the first special pattern display device 41a (also called the "first special pattern display section") described below and the result of the variable display of the second special pattern displayed on the second special pattern display device 41b (also called the "second special pattern display section"), that is, the result of the special pattern hit/miss judgment (also simply called the "hit/miss judgment"), are displayed so that the player can easily recognize them. In this embodiment, the order in which the three variable display performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed (stop order) is, in principle, "left → right → center". In other words, the first stop pattern in the stop order is the left performance pattern 8L, the second stop pattern in the stop order is the right performance pattern 8R, and the third (last) stop pattern in the stop order is the center performance pattern 8C. The first stop pattern in the stopping order is also called the "first stop pattern," the second stop pattern in the stopping order is also called the "second stop pattern," and the third stop pattern in the stopping order is also called the "third stop pattern" or "final stop pattern."

Here, the special pattern is also called "special pattern" or "special identification information", the performance pattern is also called "performance identification information", either or both of the special pattern and performance pattern are also called "pattern" or "identification information", the first special pattern is also called "special pattern 1", "first special pattern", "first special identification information" or "first identification information", the second special pattern is also called "special pattern 2", "second special pattern", "second special identification information" or "second identification information", and the normal pattern is also called "normal pattern" or "normal identification information".

Also, at least one of the first special symbol display 41a, which displays the first special symbol, the second special symbol display 41b, which displays the second special symbol, and the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81), which controls the display of the special symbols, is also referred to as the "special identification information display means", and at least one of the image display device 7 (display screen 7a), which displays the performance symbol 8, the sub-control unit 90 (performance control microcomputer 91), which controls the display of the performance symbol 8, and the image control unit 100 (image control microcomputer 101), which are described below, is also referred to as the "effect identification information display means". Furthermore, at least one of the image display device 7, the first special symbol display 41a, and the second special symbol display 41b is also referred to as the "identification information display means" or "pattern display means", or simply as the "display means".

The stop display mode of the performance pattern 8 can be determined as follows. For example, if the result of the special pattern hit/miss judgment is a jackpot, the performance pattern 8 can be stopped and displayed in a pattern arrangement of three identical digits such as "222" or "777" (so-called "double numbers"), and if the result of the special pattern hit/miss judgment is a miss, the performance pattern 8 can be stopped and displayed in a pattern arrangement in which at least one of the three patterns is different from the other patterns such as "637" or "373" (so-called "variable numbers"). The pattern arrangement of three identical digits (double numbers) is also called a "winning pattern arrangement," and the pattern arrangement in which at least one pattern is different from the other patterns (variable numbers) is also called a "missing pattern arrangement." There are multiple types of pattern arrangements (stop display modes) for the winning pattern arrangement and the missing pattern arrangement. In addition, if the result of the special pattern hit/miss judgment is a jackpot, the performance pattern 8 can be stopped and displayed in a pattern arrangement other than a double number or a double number depending on the type of the jackpot.

The player can easily grasp the progress of the game by looking at the performance symbols 8 displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In other words, the player does not generally grasp the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment directly by looking at the special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 41a or the second special symbol display device 41b, but rather by looking at the performance symbols 8 displayed on the display screen 7a (performance symbol display area 7b). Such a game performance using the performance symbols 8 can be said to be a performance (also called a "notification performance") that notifies the player of the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment. A game performance (notification performance) using the performance symbols 8 is also called a "performance symbol game performance", and a performance (i.e., a performance symbol game performance) that changes the display of the performance symbols 8 and stops the display (confirmed display) is also called a "changing performance".

Here, the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment is called a "jackpot" or a "specific result" or a "first result," and a "miss" is called a "non-specific result" or a "second result." In addition, the display mode (stop display mode) of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment is called a "jackpot," and the display mode (stop display mode, winning symbol arrangement) of the performance symbol 8 corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment is called a "specific display mode," "specific display result," or a "first display result." The display mode (stop display mode) of the special symbol corresponding to the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment is called a "non-specific display mode," "non-specific display result," or a "second display result." Furthermore, the display of the special pattern and/or the performance pattern change that is executed based on the result of the special pattern hit/miss judgment is also called a "hit" or "specific change," and the display of the special pattern and/or the performance pattern change that is executed based on the result of the special pattern hit/miss judgment is also called a "miss change" or "non-specific change."

The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 displays game effects (game effect, notification effect, variable effect) using the effect patterns 8 as described above, as well as various effect displays such as big win game effects (special game effects) that are executed in conjunction with big win games and demo effects for waiting customers. In the game effect pattern game effects (variable effects), big win game effects, and demo effects, in addition to numbers and other effect patterns, various images other than the effect patterns, such as background images and character images, are also displayed.

In addition, in the demo performance, a performance setting screen (one aspect of the display object) (not shown) can be displayed. The performance setting screen is a screen for the player to set the performance of the gaming machine, such as the volume of the sound output from the speaker 67, the brightness of the display screen 7a, the brightness of the electric decoration members such as the board lamp 5, the frame lamp 66, and the movable body lamp 15, the background display, and the execution conditions of the preview performance. While waiting for customers to play the demo performance (while waiting), the player can operate the performance button or other operating means (for example, the operating lever, the cross key, the rotary knob, etc.) to display the performance setting screen on the display screen 7a, and can operate the performance button, etc. according to the contents of the performance setting screen to arbitrarily set various settings related to the performance (so-called "customization"). Note that the performance may also be customized during variable play or special play (i.e., during play). In this case, customization during play is possible by displaying the performance setting screen on a part of the display screen 7a so as not to interfere with the game (performance) currently in progress.

The display screen 7a is provided with a judgment pattern display area 7c (also called the "judgment pattern display section") in which a judgment pattern 8s is displayed that indicates (reports) the result of the special pattern hit/miss judgment, in addition to the performance pattern 8 (see FIG. 3). In this embodiment, the judgment pattern display area 7c is provided in the upper right corner of the performance pattern display area 7b (the upper right part of the display screen 7a) (see FIG. 3). The size of the judgment pattern display area 7c is smaller than the performance pattern display area 7b, and therefore the size of the judgment pattern 8s is also smaller than the performance pattern 8. The judgment pattern 8s is also called the "small pattern" or "small identification information".

The judgment pattern 8s, like the performance pattern 8, is composed of three patterns: a left judgment pattern 8sL, a middle judgment pattern 8sC, and a right judgment pattern 8sR, and changes and displays in synchronization with the changing display of the special pattern described below, and stops and displays in synchronization with the stopping display of the special pattern. The manner in which the judgment pattern 8s changes and displays may be, for example, a scroll display in the vertical or horizontal direction, or a rotation display in the vertical or horizontal direction. Any or all of the left judgment pattern 8sL, middle judgment pattern 8sC, and right judgment pattern 8sR may be referred to simply as the "judgment pattern 8s".

In the judgment pattern display area 7c, the result of the special pattern hit/miss judgment is also displayed by the combination (stop display mode) of the left, center, and right judgment patterns 8s. In other words, the judgment pattern 8s is displayed in a variable manner and stopped display based on the result of the special pattern hit/miss judgment. In this embodiment, the judgment pattern 8s is displayed in the same stop display mode (pattern arrangement) as the stop display mode (pattern arrangement, confirmed stop pattern) of the performance pattern 8 displayed in the performance pattern display area 7b. However, there is no set stop order like the performance pattern 8, and the three judgment patterns 8sL, 8sC, and 8sR are configured to start changing display all at once when the special pattern starts to change and to stop display all at once when the special pattern stops.

The stop display mode may be different between the performance pattern 8 and the judgment pattern 8s. Also, the stop display mode (winning pattern arrangement) when the result of the special pattern hit/miss judgment is a big hit may be the same for the performance pattern 8 and the judgment pattern 8s, and the stop display mode (miss pattern arrangement) when the result is a miss may be different for the performance pattern 8 and the judgment pattern 8s. When the stop display mode (miss pattern arrangement) when the result is a miss is different for the performance pattern 8 and the judgment pattern 8s, the miss pattern arrangement of the judgment pattern 8s can be only one type (for example, "246"). This is because the player mainly looks at the performance pattern 8 to understand the result of the hit/miss judgment (hit/miss), so there is little need to provide multiple types of miss pattern arrangements for the judgment pattern 8s as with the performance pattern 8. In addition, the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment (variable game result) performed during the game progress will almost always be a miss, considering the probability of a jackpot. By limiting the miss pattern arrangement of the judgment symbol 8s to one type, it is possible to streamline and simplify the symbol display control.

The reason for displaying the judgment symbol 8s (providing the judgment symbol display area 7c) is that, for example, when a performance image that builds up the player's anticipation for a big win, such as a preview performance or a super reach performance described below, is displayed on almost the entire display screen 7a during the execution of a variable performance, the performance symbol 8 may be hidden by the performance image, or the performance symbol 8 may become invisible (erased), making it impossible to see the performance symbol 8. In other words, even if the performance symbol 8 becomes invisible (not displayed), it is possible to know through the judgment symbol 8s that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner or that it has stopped (confirmed stop). For this reason, the judgment symbol 8s is always displayed in a game state in which variable play is possible (also called a "variable play state").

The judgment pattern 8s in this embodiment is not differentiated by color like the performance pattern 8, and is displayed in the same color regardless of the number (pattern type). In this embodiment, the color (display color) of the judgment pattern 8s is a single color, "gray," which is an intermediate color between white and black. The reason why the judgment pattern 8s is a relatively inconspicuous gray (intermediate color) is that the judgment pattern 8s does not function as a pattern that the player mainly looks at to understand the result of the special pattern hit/miss judgment (i.e., a pattern that notifies the player of the result of the special pattern hit/miss judgment), but mainly functions as a pattern that shows the fluctuation status of the special pattern, and does not need to be made to stand out like the performance pattern 8. In addition, by making the color (display color) of the judgment pattern 8s a single color, it is possible to improve the efficiency and simplification of the pattern display control. However, the judgment pattern 8s may also include color information like the performance pattern 8, and may be color-coded in the same way as the performance pattern 8 or in a different way.

The display screen 7a is provided with a first effect hold display area 9c (first effect hold display section) that displays the first effect hold 9a according to the number of stored first special pattern holds described below, and a second effect hold display area 9d (second effect hold display section) that displays the second effect hold 9b according to the number of stored second special pattern holds described below. In this embodiment, the first effect hold display area 9c and the second effect hold display area 9d are provided below the effect pattern display area 7b (lower part of the display screen 7a) (see FIG. 3). Depending on the display mode (display number) of the first effect hold and the second effect hold, the number of stored first special pattern holds displayed on the first special pattern hold display 43a described below and the number of stored second special pattern holds displayed on the second special pattern hold display 43b described below can be clearly shown to the player.

Here, the first performance hold 9a displayed in the first performance hold display area 9c is also called the "first hold icon" or "first memory display", the second performance hold 9b displayed in the second performance hold display area 9d is also called the "second hold icon" or "second memory display", and either or both of the first performance hold 9a and the second performance hold 9b are also called the "hold icon" or "memory display". Also, the first performance hold display area 9c is also called the "first hold icon display section", "first memory display section", or "first memory display means", the second performance hold display area 9d is also called the "second hold icon display section", "second memory display section", or "second memory display means", and either or both of the first performance hold display area 9c and the second performance hold display area 9d are also called the "hold icon display section", "memory display section", or "memory display means".

As shown in FIG. 3, the display screen 7a is provided with a variable hold display area 9e that displays the effect hold corresponding to the currently variable special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol), i.e., the effect hold corresponding to the consumed special symbol hold (first effect hold 9a or second effect hold 9b) (see FIG. 3). In this embodiment, the variable hold display area 9e is provided to the left of the first effect hold display area 9c and the second effect hold display area 9d.

The first effect hold 9a displayed in the first effect hold display area 9c corresponds to the number of reserved balls of special pattern 1 "1", "2", "3", and "4" in order from the left end to the right end of the display area 9c, and the second effect hold 9b displayed in the second effect hold display area 9d corresponds to the number of reserved balls of special pattern 2 "1", "2", "3", and "4" in order from the left end to the right end of the display area 9d. Therefore, with the start of the variable display of the first special pattern corresponding to the number of reserved balls of special pattern 1 "1" (the consumption of the first special pattern hold), the first effect hold 9a corresponding to the hold (the first effect hold 9a displayed at the left end of the first effect hold display area 9c) moves (moves and is displayed) from the first effect hold display area 9c to the variable hold display area 9e. In addition, with the start of the variable display of the second special pattern corresponding to the number of reserved balls "1" for the special pattern 2 (consumption of the reserved second special pattern), the second performance reserve 9b (the second performance reserve 9b displayed at the left end of the second performance reserve display area 9d) corresponding to the reserved ball moves (is moved and displayed) from the second performance reserve display area 9d to the variable reserve display area 9e. The number of reserved balls is also simply called the "reserved number". In addition, when the number of reserved balls for the special pattern is "0" and a game ball enters the start hole (the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21) and the variable display of the special pattern begins, the performance reserve (the first performance reserve 9a or the second performance reserve 9b) is displayed in the variable reserve display area 9e with the start ball entering, which is the trigger for the start of the variable display (variable game).

Here, the variable hold display area 9e can also be called a "hold icon display section," "memory display section," or "memory display means," and the effect hold displayed in the variable hold display area 9e can also be called a "hold icon" or "memory display." The effect hold displayed in the variable hold display area 9e is also called a "variable memory display," "variable hold icon," or "active hold icon," and the effect hold (hold icon) displayed in the effect hold display areas 9c and 9d and the effect hold (active hold icon) displayed in the variable hold display area 9e are collectively called "memory display" or "hold icon." In addition, either or both of the effect hold display areas 9c and 9d and the variable hold display area 9e that can display the effect holds 9a and 9b are also referred to as "effect hold display section" or "effect hold display means."

As described above, the display screen 7a (image display device 7) capable of displaying various effect displays and effect images (also referred to as "display objects") is also referred to as the "effect display section" or "effect display means", or simply as the "display section". In addition, effects (effects performed on the display screen) that are performed by displaying the display screen 7a, such as game effects using effect patterns 8 (effect pattern game effects, notification effects, variable effects), jackpot game effects, demo effects, and preview effects described below, are also referred to as "display effects".

A center decorative body 10 (so-called "center role") is provided near the center of the game board 2 (game area 3) and in front of the image display device 7 (display means) so as to surround the display screen 7a. The center decorative body 10 is made of a plastic (resin) molded part, and is attached to the surface (front) of the game board 2 as a frame-shaped part (board part) with an opening in the middle. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 can be seen through the central opening of the center decorative body 10.

At the bottom of the center decorative body 10, a stage section 11 is provided with a game ball rolling surface on which game balls can roll, and at the left of the center decorative body 10, a hollow warp section 12 is provided. The warp section 12 is provided with a warp entrance and a warp exit, and guides game balls flowing down the game area 3 (left game area 3A) to the stage section 11 by receiving the game balls from the warp entrance and discharging them from the warp exit. Game balls guided to the rolling surface of the stage section 11 are more likely to enter the first starting hole 20 described below than game balls that are not guided to the stage section 11. In addition, at the top of the center decorative body 10, a decorative member 13 is provided that has an electric member such as an LED (board lamp 5) that can be lit or blinked depending on the game status, and is shaped like letters or figures.

A movable performance member 14 (also called a "movable body") that can be operated in a predetermined operating manner is provided at the top of the center decorative body 10 and to the left of the decorative member 13. In this embodiment, the movable performance member 14 (movable body) is a circular movable body with a sawtooth outer periphery as shown in Figure 3, and is provided so that it is always visible to the player. The movable performance member 14 is normally (when not in operation) located in a standby position (initial position) on the upper left side (top left) of the center decorative body 10, and is designed so as not to cover the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (see Figure 44 (A)).

When the condition for moving the movable performance member 14 from the standby position to the operating position (also called the "operating condition") is met, the movable performance member 14 starts operating and moves from the standby position to a predetermined operating position. Specifically, the movable performance member 14 moves diagonally downward to the right from the standby position and stops at a position (operating position) that covers approximately the center part of the display screen 7a (see FIG. 44 (B)). When the movable performance member 14 is in the operating position, the movable performance member 14 is located in front of the display screen 7a and covers a part of the display screen 7a (in this embodiment, a part of the performance pattern display area 7b). From this state, when the condition for moving the movable performance member 14 from the operating position to the standby position (also called the "return condition") is met, the movable performance member 14 starts operating and moves from the operating position to the standby position. Specifically, the movable performance member 14 moves diagonally upward to the left from the operating position and stops at the standby position in the upper left of the display screen 7a (see FIG. 44 (A)). In this way, the movable performance member 14 can move (operate) (be displaceable) between the standby position and the operating position.

The movable performance member 14 (movable body) is provided with a movable body lamp 15 (also called "movable body illumination") consisting of multiple LEDs, and the movable body lamp 15 can emit light together with or separately from the movable performance. That is, the movable performance member 14 in this embodiment is configured to include the movable body lamp 15. Furthermore, when the movable performance member 14 is moved to the operating position (in front of the display screen 7a), it can rotate around an axis (not shown) perpendicular to the display screen 7a (see Figure 44 (B)).

In this embodiment, the effect of operating the movable effect member 14 (also called the "moving effect") can be performed as a preview effect during the changing display of the effect pattern 8, or as part of a reach effect. By executing such a moving effect, it is possible to heighten (incite) the player's anticipation for a big win. When the end condition for the moving effect is met, the movable effect member 14 moves (returns) to its original standby position.

Here, the movable performance member 14 corresponds to a so-called "gimmick," and the performance (moving performance) that operates the movable performance member 14 corresponds to a "gimmick performance." The movable performance member 14 (movable body) is also called the "moving part" or "moving performance means." In other words, the movable performance member 14 functions as a moving part for performance (moving performance part).

In this embodiment, one movable performance member 14 is provided at the top of the center decorative body 10, but the position at which the movable performance member is provided and the number of movable performance members are not limited to this. For example, a movable performance member may be provided on either the left or right side or both sides of the central opening (display screen 7a) of the center decorative body 10, or a movable performance member may be provided below (on the stage section 11 side) the central opening (display screen 7a) of the center decorative body 10. A movable performance member may also be provided on the front frame 51. In this case, a pattern in which a movable performance that activates the movable performance member on the game board side (also called "board side movable performance" or "first movable performance") is executed, and a pattern in which a movable performance that activates the movable performance member on the frame side (also called "frame side movable performance" or "second movable performance") is executed can be provided. The movable performance member on the game board side is also called "board side movable performance member" or "board side movable body", and the movable performance member on the frame side is also called "frame side movable performance member" or "frame side movable body". In this way, by increasing the variety of movable effects, it is possible to increase the interest in the game. In addition to the movable effect member 14, for example, if the effect button 63 vibrates, the effect (gimmick effect) that activates the effect button 63 can also be called a "movable effect," and the effect button 63 can also be called a "movable part" or "movable effect means."

In addition, the performance of generating (outputting) various sounds (sound effects) from the speaker 67 is also called sound performance, and the speaker 67 is also called "sound performance means". In addition, the performance of illuminating the play board surface lamp 5, the frame lamp 66, the decorative member 13, the movable body lamp 15, etc. is also called "light-emitting performance" or "light performance", and the play board surface lamp 5, the frame lamp 66, the decorative member 13, the movable body lamp 15, etc. are also called "light-emitting part" or "light-emitting performance means". In addition to the board surface lamp 5, for example, when the performance button 63 or the launch handle 60 has an electric decoration member such as an LED built in and the electric decoration member lights up or flashes, etc., the performance of illuminating the performance button 63 or the launch handle 60 can be called "light-emitting performance", and the electric decoration member built in the performance button 63 or the launch handle 60 can be called "light-emitting part" or "light-emitting performance means". The "display performance means", "movable performance means", "sound performance means" and "light-emitting performance means" are collectively called "performance means".

A fixed winning device 19 is provided below the image display device 7 in the game area 3 (below the stage section 11), which is equipped with a non-variable first starting hole 20 (also called a "non-variable starting hole" or "fixed starting hole") in which the ease with which the game ball can enter (the probability of entering) does not change. A random number or the like for determining whether or not the special pattern has been won is obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 20, and when a predetermined condition is met, a win/loss determination for the first special pattern (first special pattern win/loss determination) is made, and the variable display and stationary display of the first special pattern are made based on the result of the win/loss determination.

Below the first starting hole 20, there is provided a variable winning device 22 equipped with a variable second starting hole 21 (also called a "variable starting hole") that changes the ease with which the game ball can enter (the probability of entering). The variable winning device 22 (second starting hole 21) is normally provided as an electric device.

A random number or the like for determining whether or not a special symbol has been hit is obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 21, and when a predetermined condition is met, a determination as to whether or not the second special symbol has been hit (second special symbol hit/miss determination) is executed, and the varying display of the second special symbol is executed and shown based on the result of the hit/miss determination.

The variable winning device 22 includes a movable member 23, and opens and closes the second starting hole 21 by the operation of the movable member 23. By this opening and closing operation, the second starting hole 21 can be changed between a first state (closed state) and a second state (open state) in which the probability of a game ball entering the hole is higher than that of the first state. In other words, the movable member 23 changes the probability of a game ball entering the second starting hole 21 by performing a predetermined operation (opening and closing operation). The movable member 23 is driven by the second starting hole solenoid 24 (see FIG. 5). In this embodiment, the second starting hole 21 is capable of receiving a game ball only when the movable member 23 is in an open state, and is not capable of receiving a game ball when the movable member 23 is in a closed state. Note that the second starting hole 21 does not have to be completely incapable of receiving a game ball when the movable member 23 is in a closed state, as long as it is more difficult for a game ball to enter the hole when the movable member 23 is in a closed state than when the movable member 23 is in an open state.

To the right of the first starting hole 20 in the game area 3, a big prize device 31 equipped with a big prize hole 30 (also called a "special ball hole" or a "variable ball hole") is provided. This big prize device 31 (big prize hole 30) is provided as a special electric device.

The large prize winning device 31 is equipped with an opening/closing member 32, and opens and closes the large prize winning opening 30 by operating the opening/closing member 32. The opening/closing member 32 is driven by a large prize winning opening solenoid 33 (see FIG. 5). The large prize winning opening 30 can receive game balls only when the opening/closing member 32 is in the open state. In other words, the large prize winning device 31 can be changed between a ball-entry-prohibited state (closed state) in which game balls cannot enter and a ball-entry-possible state (open state) in which game balls can enter, by the opening and closing operation of the opening/closing member 32.

A gate 28 (passing opening) through which the game ball can pass is provided in the right area of the game area 3. Random numbers for determining whether the normal pattern is a hit or not are obtained based on the passage of the game ball through the gate 28, and when a predetermined condition is met, a normal pattern hit or miss determination is executed to determine whether the second start opening 21 should be opened or not, and the normal pattern is displayed in a variable manner and is displayed as a stopped state based on the result of the normal pattern hit or miss determination. When the winning normal pattern is displayed as a stopped state, the second start opening 21 is opened.

The lower area of the game area 3 is provided with multiple general winning holes 27. The first start hole 20, the second start hole 21, the large winning hole 30 and the general winning hole 27 are each ball entry holes that trigger the payout of prize balls, and when a game ball enters each ball entry hole, a predetermined number of game balls (prize balls) are paid out to each ball entry hole. For example, the number of prize balls at the first start hole 20 is "3", the number of prize balls at the second start hole 21 is "1", the number of prize balls at the large winning hole 30 is "15", and the number of prize balls at the general winning hole 27 is "10".

The game area 3, which is thus arranged with multiple ball entry ports (first start port 20, second start port 21, big prize port 30, general prize port 27, and gate 28), can be divided into a left game area 3A (first area) on the left side of the center in the left-right direction, and a right game area 3B (second area) on the right side. Firing a game ball so that it flows down the left game area 3A is also called a "left hit," and firing a game ball so that it flows down the right game area 3B is also called a "right hit."

Of the multiple ball entry ports, the first start port 20 and the left general winning port 27 are provided so that game balls flowing down the left game area 3A of the game area 3 can enter, and the second start port 21, the big winning port 30, the right general winning port 27, and the gate 28 are provided so that game balls flowing down the right game area 3B of the game area 3 can enter. For this reason, in the pachinko game machine 1, when starting a game, the player generally aims to enter the first start port 20 by hitting from the left. On the other hand, when a big win is determined based on the ball entering the first start port 20 and the game state changes to a special game state, etc., the player generally aims to enter the gate 28, the second start port 21, and the big winning port 30 by hitting from the right. The number of starting gates, big prize gates, general prize gates, and gates is not limited to that in this embodiment, and the number of each can be any number, such as three starting gates, two big prize gates, four general prize gates, and two gates.

As shown in Figures 3 and 4, a main display 40 is provided outside the play area 3 (outside the play area) and at the bottom right of the play board 2. The main display 40 includes a first special pattern display 41a (first special pattern display section) for displaying the first special pattern as it changes and stops, a second special pattern display 41b (second special pattern display section) for displaying the second special pattern as it changes and stops, an ordinary pattern display 42 (ordinary pattern display section) for displaying the ordinary pattern as it changes and stops, a first special pattern reserved display 43a for displaying the number of pieces of win/loss determination information relating to the first special pattern (first special pattern reserved), a second special pattern reserved display 43b for displaying the number of pieces of win/loss determination information relating to the second special pattern (second special pattern reserved), and an operation reservation display ( The main display 40 includes a normal symbol reserved indicator 44 that displays the number of stored normal symbol reserved symbols, a round indicator 45 (round display section) that indicates the number of rounds of the jackpot game that will be played if the result of the first special symbol hit/miss judgment or the second special symbol hit/miss judgment is a jackpot, a game status indicator 46 that indicates that the probability fluctuation function is activated, a launch direction indicator 47 (launch direction display section) that indicates the launch direction of the game ball (whether it should be hit to the left or to the right), and a win indicator 48 (win display section) that indicates the result of the first special symbol hit/miss judgment or the second special symbol hit/miss judgment is a win (see FIG. 4). The display of these various indicators included in the main display 40 is controlled by the main control section 80, which will be described later.

The first special pattern and the second special pattern are sometimes collectively referred to as the special patterns, the first special pattern display 41a and the second special pattern display 41b are sometimes collectively referred to as the "special pattern display" or "special pattern display section", and the first special pattern reserve display 43a and the second special pattern reserve display 43b are sometimes collectively referred to as the "special pattern reserve display" or "special pattern reserve display section".

The special pattern display section displays a special pattern (identification information) in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time and then stops and displays it, and the stopped special pattern (stop pattern) notifies the result of a lottery (special pattern hit/miss judgment, jackpot lottery) based on a ball entering the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21. In other words, the variable display of the first special pattern is performed based on the game ball entering the first start hole 20, and the variable display of the second special pattern is performed based on the game ball entering the second start hole 21. The stopped special pattern (stop pattern) is one stop pattern selected from a plurality of stop patterns depending on the result of the special pattern hit/miss judgment. If the stopped symbol is a predetermined jackpot symbol (specific special symbol, specific identification information), that is, if the stopped display mode of the special symbol (display result of the variable display of the special symbol) is a specific display mode (specific display result) indicating a jackpot, the game transitions to a jackpot game state (special game state) in which a jackpot game (special game) is executed in which the jackpot winning hole 30 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type of jackpot symbol stopped and displayed. The opening pattern of the jackpot winning hole in the jackpot game will be described later.

The special symbol is displayed until a specified display time (fixed display time) has elapsed. If the special symbol displayed is a losing symbol (losing mode, non-specific mode) and a reserved special symbol is stored at the time of the display, the oldest (earliest) reserved special symbol in the stored order is consumed when the display time has elapsed, and the variable display of the next special symbol begins. If the special symbol displayed is a losing symbol and a reserved special symbol is not stored at the time of the display, the special symbol remains displayed even after the display time has elapsed. On the other hand, if the special symbol displayed is a jackpot symbol, the game moves to the opening period of the jackpot game, which will be described later, when the display time has elapsed, and the first round of the jackpot game begins after the opening period.

The stop display time for special symbols is generally set to "0.5 to 1.0 seconds", and in this embodiment it is set to "0.6 seconds". The stop display time when the special symbol displayed is a miss symbol (miss stop display time) may be different from the stop display time when the special symbol displayed is a jackpot symbol (jackpot stop display time). In this case, the jackpot stop display time can be made longer than the miss stop display time, and the miss stop display time can be made longer than the jackpot stop display time. The stop display time may also be different depending on the game state, such as a low base state or a high base state, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 4, the first special symbol display 41a is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "i-p" and displays a special symbol according to the result of the first special symbol hit/miss judgment. In this embodiment, seven types of hits are provided as the result of the first special symbol hit/miss judgment: "10R 1st hit", "10R 2nd hit", "10R 3rd hit", "10R 4th hit", "10R 5th hit", "5R 6th hit", and "5R 7th hit" (see FIG. 6 and FIG. 8), and the LEDs of the first special symbol display 41a are capable of displaying a display mode (specific display mode, specific display result) according to each of the seven types of hits. For example, if the result of the first special symbol hit/miss judgment is 10R first jackpot, two "ij" LEDs are turned on and the rest are turned off (10R first jackpot symbol), if it is 10R second jackpot, two "in" LEDs are turned on and the rest are turned off (10R second jackpot symbol), if it is 10R third jackpot, two "im" LEDs are turned on and the rest are turned off (10R third jackpot symbol), etc., various jackpot symbols (specific display mode, specific display result) are displayed by combinations of turning on and off the multiple LEDs that make up the first special symbol display 41a. Also, if the result of the first special symbol hit/miss judgment is a miss, one "p" LED is turned on and the rest are turned off (miss symbol).

On the other hand, the second special symbol display 41b is composed of eight LEDs indicated by "a-h" and displays special symbols according to the result of the second special symbol hit/miss judgment. In this embodiment, two types of jackpots, "10R 8th jackpot" and "10R 9th jackpot", are provided as the result of the second special symbol hit/miss judgment (see Figures 6 and 8), and the LEDs of the second special symbol display 41b can adopt display modes (specific modes, specific display results) according to each of the two types of jackpots. For example, if the result of the second special pattern hit/miss judgment is a 10R 8th jackpot, the three "abd" LEDs are lit and the rest are turned off (10R 8th jackpot pattern), and if the result is a 10R 9th jackpot, the three "abg" LEDs are lit and the rest are turned off (10R 9th jackpot pattern), etc., various jackpot patterns (specific display modes, specific display results) are displayed by combining the lighting and extinguishing of the multiple LEDs that make up the second special pattern display 41b. Also, if it is a miss, one "h" LED is lit and the rest are turned off (miss pattern).

The stopping display mode of the special symbols (stopping symbols) and the type of jackpot (type of number of rounds, number of jackpots, etc.) are not limited to these and can be set arbitrarily.

Before the special symbol is displayed in a static state, the special symbol is displayed in a specific time period. The special symbol can be displayed in a static state where the LEDs are lit so that light flows repeatedly in a predetermined order, such as clockwise or counterclockwise. The first special symbol displayed in a static state on the first special symbol display 41a is maintained in a static display state until the aforementioned static display time has elapsed, at which point the next display begins. Similarly, the second special symbol displayed in a static state on the second special symbol display 41b is maintained in a static display state until the aforementioned static display time has elapsed, at which point the next display begins. If the next display does not begin, the static display state is maintained even after the static display time has elapsed.

In the pachinko game machine 1, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21, various information (also called "acquired information") such as a random number for determining whether or not a special symbol is drawn is acquired based on the ball (acquisition means), and the acquired various information can be stored as a special symbol reservation (also called "reserved information") in a special symbol reservation memory unit (not shown) formed in the RAM of the main control unit 80 (reserved memory means). Specifically, if the ball enters the first starting hole 20, it is stored as a first special symbol reservation (also called "first reserved information") in the first special symbol reservation memory unit (not shown), and if the ball enters the second starting hole 21, it is stored as a second special symbol reservation (also called "second reserved information") in the second special symbol reservation memory unit (not shown). An upper limit is set for the number of special symbol reservations (acquired information) that can be stored in each special symbol reservation memory unit, and in this embodiment, the upper limit is "4".

Here, the "special chart reservation memory unit" is also referred to as the "acquired information storage means" or "reserved storage means", the first special chart reservation memory unit is also referred to as the "first acquired information storage means" or "first reserved storage means", and the second special chart reservation memory unit is also referred to as the "second acquired information storage means" or "second reserved storage means". In addition, either or both of the first special chart reservation memory unit and the second special chart reservation memory unit are also referred to as the "special chart reservation memory unit", "acquired information storage means" or "reserved storage means", or simply referred to as the "storage means".

The reserved special symbols stored in the reserved special symbols memory unit are consumed when the display of the special symbols based on the reserved special symbols starts (is executed). In other words, the consumption of reserved special symbols means judging the random number for judging whether the special symbols are correct or not corresponding to the reserved special symbols, and executing the display of the special symbols to show the result of the judgment. Therefore, in the pachinko game machine 1, even if the display of the special symbols based on the ball entering the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21 cannot be executed immediately at the time of the ball entering, that is, even if the display of the special symbols is being executed or a special game is being executed, it is possible to reserve the right to judge whether the ball is correct or not up to a predetermined number (4 in this embodiment).

The number of reserved special drawings stored in the reserved special drawing memory unit is displayed on the first reserved special drawing display 43a and the second reserved special drawing display 43b. Specifically, the first reserved special drawing display 43a is composed of two LEDs, "uv", and displays the number of reserved first special drawings by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of reserved first special drawings. For example, when the number of pending items is "0", the display mode may be "u□v□" (for example, □ is off, ● is red, ▲ is green) with both LEDs turned off; when the number of pending items is "1", the display mode may be "u□v●" with the "u" LED turned off and the "v" LED turned red; when the number of pending items is "2", the display mode may be "u●v□" with the "u" LED turned red and the "v" LED turned off; when the number of pending items is "3", the display mode may be "u●v●" with both LEDs lit red; and when the number of pending items is "4 (maximum number)", the display mode may be "u▲v▲" with both LEDs lit green.

The second special chart reserved indicator 43b is composed of two LEDs, "wx", and displays the number of second special chart reserved by controlling the display of the LEDs according to the number of second special chart reserved. For example, when the reserved number is "0", the display mode is "w□x□" (for example, □: off, ●: red lit, ▲: green lit), with both LEDs turned off, and the reserved numbers "1" to "4" are determined in the same way as the first special chart reserved indicator 43a.

In addition, similar to the first effect pending display area 9c and the second effect pending display area 9d described above, the first special chart pending display device 43a can be referred to as the "first memory display unit" or "first memory display means", the second special chart pending display device 43b can be referred to as the "second memory display unit" or "second memory display means", and either or both of the first special chart pending display device 43a and the second special chart pending display device 43b can be referred to as the "memory display unit" or "memory display means".

The normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner when the game ball passes through the gate 28. The normal symbol display 42 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time, and then displays it in a stopped state. The stopped normal symbol (stopped symbol) notifies the user of the result of the normal symbol win/loss judgment based on the game ball passing through the gate 28. The stopped normal symbol is one normal symbol selected from a plurality of types of normal symbols by the normal symbol win/loss judgment. If the stopped normal symbol is a specific normal symbol (a winning normal symbol), an auxiliary game is played in which the second start hole 21 is opened in an opening pattern according to the current game state. The opening pattern of the second start hole 21 will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 4, the normal pattern display 42 is composed of two LEDs, "st", and the normal pattern can be displayed according to the result of the normal pattern hit/miss judgment by the lighting state of the LEDs. For example, if the judgment result is a hit, the winning normal pattern with both LEDs lit is displayed as "s■t■" (for example, ■: lit, □: off). If the judgment result is a miss, a miss normal pattern (non-specific normal pattern) is displayed with only the "t" LED lit as "s□t■". Before the normal pattern is displayed, the normal pattern is displayed for a predetermined variable time. The variable display mode is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs alternately light up and go out. In addition, the normal pattern displayed on the normal pattern display 42 is maintained in the stopped display mode until the stopped display time has elapsed, and the next variable display starts when the stopped display time has elapsed. If the next variable display does not start, the stopped display mode is maintained even after the stopped display time has elapsed.

In the pachinko game machine 1, when a game ball passes through the gate 28, various information (also referred to as "acquired information") such as a random number for determining whether a normal pattern is a hit or miss is acquired based on the passage, and the acquired various information can be stored as a normal pattern reserve (reserved information) in a normal pattern reserve memory section (not shown) formed in the RAM of the main control section 80. An upper limit is set for the number of normal pattern reserves that can be stored in the normal pattern reserve memory section, and in this embodiment, the upper limit is "4". The normal pattern reserves stored in the normal pattern reserve memory section are consumed when it becomes possible to display a variable normal pattern based on that normal pattern reserve. Consumption of a normal pattern reserve refers to determining the random number for determining whether a normal pattern is a hit or miss corresponding to that normal pattern reserve, and executing a variable normal pattern display to show the result of the determination. Therefore, in pachinko game machine 1, even if the display of normal symbols based on the passage of the game ball through gate 28 cannot be executed immediately at the time of the passage, i.e., even if the display of normal symbols is being executed or an auxiliary game is being executed, the right to judge whether the normal symbols are correct or not for the passage can be reserved up to a specified number.

The number of reserved regular maps stored in the reserved regular map memory unit is displayed on the reserved regular map display 44. Specifically, the reserved regular map display 44 is composed of two LEDs, "qr", and displays the number of reserved regular maps by lighting up the LEDs according to the number of reserved regular maps. For example, when the reserved number is "0", the display mode is "q□r□" (for example, □: off, ●: red lit, ▲: green lit), with both LEDs off, and when the reserved number is "1", the display mode is "q□r●", with the "q" LED off and the "r" LED lit in red. The reserved numbers "2" to "4" are also determined in the same way as the first reserved regular map display 43a.

As shown in FIG. 4, the round display 45 is composed of two LEDs, a 5R lamp and a 10R lamp. For example, when a 5R jackpot is hit on the round display 45, the 5R lamp is lit when the corresponding jackpot pattern is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, the display mode is something like "5▲10R△" (for example, △: off, ▲: on). Also, when a 10R jackpot is hit, the 10R lamp is lit when the corresponding jackpot pattern is confirmed and displayed. Specifically, the display mode is something like "5△10R▲" (for example, △: off, ▲: on).

[Electrical configuration of pachinko gaming machine 1]
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described with reference to Figures 2 and 5. The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment includes a main control board (also called the "main control unit" or "game control unit") 80 that controls the progress of the game and the game profit, such as the judgment of whether a special symbol is a hit or a hit of a normal symbol, and the transition of the game state, a sub-control board (also called the "sub-control unit" or "performance control unit") 90 that controls the performance executed with the progress of the game, an image control board (also called the "image control unit") 100 that controls the display of the image display device 7, a sound control board (also called the "sound control unit") 106 that controls the output of sound effects by the speaker 67, a lamp control board (also called the "lamp control unit") 107 that controls the drive of the board lamp 5, the frame lamp 66, etc., a payout control board (also called the "payout control unit") 110 that controls the payout of game balls, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 2, a main control board storage case is provided in the approximate center of the rear side (back side) of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and an image control board storage case is provided above the main control board case, storing the sound control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the image control board 100, and a sub-control board storage case is provided above the image control board storage case, storing the sub-control board 90. In addition, a payout control board case storing the payout control board 110 is provided below and to the left of the main control board case, and a power supply board case storing the power supply board 109 is provided to the right of the payout control board case. The power supply board 109 supplies the power required to drive (operate) the various boards provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the various electrical components connected to the boards (power supply means).

As shown in FIG. 5, the main control board 80 is equipped with a one-chip game control microcomputer (also called a "game control microcomputer") 81 that controls the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a ROM that stores programs for controlling the progress of the game, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM. The main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) functions as a game control means that can control the progress of the game.

The game control microcomputer 81 transmits and receives data (information) to and from other boards, etc., via an input/output circuit 87 (I/O port section). The input/output circuit 87 may be built into the game control microcomputer 81. The ROM may also be external. The ROM of the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) stores various data necessary to control the progress of the game, such as tables used for various judgments and decisions (selections) related to the progress of the game, the fluctuation patterns of special and normal symbols, and the opening patterns of the second starting hole 21 and the big winning hole 30. The fluctuation pattern specifies the time required from the start to the end of the fluctuation display (fluctuation time) and the contents of the performance (fluctuation performance) to be executed in accordance with the fluctuation time, etc.

The RAM of the game control microcomputer 81 is provided with the special chart reserve memory section (first special chart reserve memory section and second special chart reserve memory section) and the regular chart reserve memory section, etc. In addition, a memory area is reserved at a predetermined address in the RAM (main control RAM) of the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81) for use with various flags and various counting counters.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via a relay board 88. Therefore, signals are input from each sensor to the main control board 80, and signals are output from the main control board 80 to each solenoid. Specifically, the first start hole sensor 20a, the second start hole sensor 21a, the gate sensor 28a, the special prize hole sensor 30a, and the general prize hole sensor 27a are connected as sensors capable of detecting game balls.

The first start port sensor 20a is provided in the first start port 20 and detects game balls that have entered the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21a is provided in the second start port 21 and detects game balls that have entered the second start port 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided in the gate 28 and detects game balls that have passed through the gate 28. The large prize port sensor 30a is provided in the large prize port 30 and detects game balls that have entered the large prize port 30. The general prize port sensor 27a is provided in each general prize port 27 and detects game balls that have entered the general prize port 27. These sensors capable of detecting game balls are also called "ball detection sensors" or "game ball detection means".

The solenoids connected are the second start port solenoid 24 and the large prize port solenoid 33. The second start port solenoid 24 is for driving the movable member 23 of the variable prize device 22. The large prize port solenoid 33 is for driving the opening/closing member 32 of the large prize device 31.

In addition to the ball detection sensor, the sensors connected to the main control board 80 via the relay board 88 include a radio wave sensor 71 capable of detecting radio waves output from a radio wave output device, and a magnetic sensor 72 capable of detecting magnetic fields emitted from a magnet.

The radio wave sensor 71 detects radio waves when they are output from a radio wave output device on the front side of the game board 2, for example. This radio wave sensor 71 is provided mainly to detect fraudulent behavior (so-called "radio wave cheating") that causes the ball detection sensor to falsely detect the ball using radio waves (unauthorized radio waves), and one or more are provided depending on the number and positions of the ball entrances (ball detection sensors) that are the target of radio wave cheating countermeasures, the detection range of the radio waves (detection performance), etc. Specifically, for example, the radio wave sensor 71 can be provided for the first entrance 20 (first entrance sensor 20a) and the second entrance 21 (second entrance sensor 21a), which are the trigger for executing the special symbol hit/miss judgment.

The detection signal of the radio wave sensor 71 (also called the "radio wave detection signal" or "radio wave sensor signal") input to the main control board 80 is, for example, OFF (non-detection state) when the radio wave sensor 71 is not detecting radio waves (unauthorized radio waves), and is ON (detection state) when the radio wave sensor 71 detects radio waves (unauthorized radio waves).

The magnetic sensor 72 detects the magnetism of a magnet when the magnet is brought close to the surface of the window (viewing window) of the front frame 51, for example. This magnetic sensor 72 is provided mainly to detect fraudulent behavior (so-called "magnet goto") in which a magnet is used to forcibly guide a game ball to a starting hole, a general winning hole, a specific area (V area), etc., and one or more magnetic sensors are provided depending on the number and position of the ball entry holes (ball detection sensors) that are the target of magnetic goto countermeasures, the magnetic detection range (detection performance), etc. Specifically, for example, the magnetic sensor 72 can be provided for the first starting hole 20, which triggers the execution of the special symbol hit/miss determination, and the general winning hole 27, which triggers the payout of prize balls.

The detection signal of the magnetic sensor 72 (also called the "magnetic detection signal" or "magnetic sensor signal") input to the main control board 80 is, for example, OFF (non-detection state) when the magnetic sensor 72 does not detect magnetism, and ON (detection state) when the magnetic sensor 72 detects magnetism.

The radio wave sensor 71 and the magnetic sensor 72 that can detect fraudulent behavior such as radio wave or magnetic interference are also called "fraud detection sensor" or "fraud detection means". It is also possible to provide a vibration sensor that can detect vibrations given to the gaming machine as the fraud detection sensor (fraud detection means). The vibration sensor is provided mainly to detect fraudulent behavior (so-called "banging") in which the gaming machine is struck to apply vibrations (impacts) to the gaming board (gaming area) and direct the gaming ball toward a specific area (V area) that is the trigger for granting a gaming privilege or a lottery area (e.g., a starting hole) that is the trigger for executing a lottery for granting a gaming privilege, when the gaming ball flows down the area. An example of a gaming privilege is a transition to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a jackpot gaming state or a probability bonus gaming state.

The main control board 80 is connected to a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol reserved display 43a, a second special symbol reserved display 43b, a normal symbol reserved display 44, a round display 45, a game status display 46, a launch direction display 47, and a win display 48. The display control of these main displays 40 is performed by a game control microcomputer 81.

The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110 and receives signals from the payout control board 110 to monitor payouts. The payout control board 110 is connected to a payout device 120 that pays out prize balls and loan balls, and a card unit 135 (installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 and enabling ball lending based on information stored in an inserted prepaid card (game value storage medium) or the like), as well as to a launching device 112 via a launch control board (also called the "launch control unit") 111. The launching device 112 includes a launch handle 60 (see FIG. 1).

The payout control board 110 is equipped with a payout control one-chip microcomputer (also called a "payout control microcomputer") 116 that controls the payout of game balls according to a predetermined program. The payout control microcomputer 116 includes a ROM that stores programs for controlling the payout of game balls, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM.

The payout control microcomputer 116 drives the payout motor 121 of the payout device 120 to pay out prize balls and loan balls based on signals from the game control microcomputer 81 and signals from the card unit 135 connected to the pachinko game machine 1 via the input/output circuit 117. The paid-out game balls are detected by the payout sensors 122 and 123 to count them. When the launch handle 60 of the launch device 112 is operated, the touch switch 114 detects the touch of the operator (player) to the launch handle 60, and the launch volume 115 detects the amount of rotation of the launch handle 60. The launch motor 113 is then driven and controlled so that the game balls are fired with a strength (firing strength) according to the magnitude of the detection signal from the launch volume 115. In this embodiment, the number of game balls that can be fired continuously by the launch motor 113 is about 100 per minute.

The payout control board 110 is connected to a frame open detection switch 70 that can detect when the front frame 51 is open. The frame open detection switch 70 is also called "open detection means". The frame open detection switch 70 is provided, for example, on the front frame 51 or the main frame 52, and is configured to switch on and off in response to the state change when the front frame 51 changes from a closed state (closed state) to an open state (open state) or from an open state to a closed state. In other words, the frame open detection switch 70 is also an open/close detection switch that detects the opening and closing of the front frame 51. The open/close detection switch is also called "open/close detection means". The front frame 51 is opened and closed by the operation of a game hall staff member (operation from outside) when performing maintenance work on the game board 2 or work to resolve ball jams (so-called "grapes") in the game area 3, for example.

The detection signal of the frame open detection switch 70 (also called the "frame open detection signal") input to the dispensing control board 110 is, for example, OFF (non-detection state) when the front frame 51 is in a closed state, and ON (detection state) when the front frame 51 is in an open state. In other words, when the frame open detection switch 70 detects the opening of the front frame 51 (a change in the front frame 51 from a closed state to an open state), the detection signal of the frame open detection switch 70 turns ON. Also, when the frame open detection switch 70 detects the closing of the front frame 51 (a change in the front frame 51 from an open state to a closed state), the detection signal of the frame open detection switch 70 turns OFF.

The frame open detection signal input to the payout control board 110 is input to the main control board 80. In other words, the detection signal of the frame open detection switch 70 is input to the main control board 80 via the payout control board 110. The game control microcomputer 81 is capable of detecting the state (open or closed) of the front frame 51 based on the state of the input frame open detection signal. In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 is capable of detecting radio wave cheating and magnetic cheating based on the state of the aforementioned radio wave detection signal and magnetic detection signal input to the main control board 80.

If the front frame 51 opens or fraudulent activity occurs, it becomes difficult (impossible) to play normally, and the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes unsuitable for play. The occurrence of such an unsuitable state for play (in this embodiment, a state in which the front frame 51 is open or a state in which fraudulent activity has occurred) can be detected based on the state of the frame open detection signal, radio wave detection signal, and magnetic detection signal.

The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub-control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 is a one-way communication connection that only allows transmission from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90. In other words, a one-way circuit (not shown, for example, a circuit using a diode) is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub-control board 90 as a means for restricting the direction of communication.

As shown in FIG. 5, the sub-control board 90 is equipped with a one-chip microcomputer for performance control (also called a "performance control microcomputer") 91 that controls the performance of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a predetermined program. The performance control microcomputer 91 includes a ROM that stores programs for controlling the performance that is performed as the game progresses, a RAM used as a work memory, and a CPU that executes the programs stored in the ROM.

The performance control microcomputer 91 transmits and receives data to and from other boards, etc., via the input/output circuit 95. The input/output circuit 95 may be built into the performance control microcomputer 91, and the ROM may be external. The ROM of the sub-control board 90 (performance control microcomputer 91) stores various data necessary to control the performance, such as tables used for various judgments and decisions (selections) related to game performance, and performance patterns such as variable performance and advance notice performance. In addition, memory areas are reserved at specified addresses in the RAM (performance control RAM) of the sub-control board 90 (performance control microcomputer 91) for use with various flags and various counting counters.

The sub-control board 90 is connected to the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, the lamp control board 107, etc. The sub-control board 90 (the performance control microcomputer 91) cooperates with the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, and the lamp control board 107 according to the game situation, and causes the corresponding performance devices, components, etc. (performance means) to execute various performances such as display performances, sound performances, and lamp performances (light-emitting performances). This sub-control board 90 (the performance control microcomputer 91) functions as a performance execution means (also called a "performance control means") that can execute various performances according to the game situation. It should be noted that at least one of the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, and the lamp control board 107 can be regarded as functioning as a performance execution means (performance control means) together with the sub-control board 90. In addition, since the performance includes variable performances and advance notice performances as described later, the performance execution means (performance control means) can function as a variable performance execution means or an advance notice performance execution means.

Based on commands received from the main control board 80, the sub-control board 90 (performance control microcomputer 91) causes the CPU of the image control one-chip microcomputer (also called the "image control microcomputer") 101 of the image control board 100 to control the display of the image display device 7.

The RAM of the image control board 100 is a memory for expanding image data. The ROM of the image control board 100 stores various image data such as still image data and video data to be displayed on the image display device 7, specifically characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including performance patterns, reserved patterns, etc.) and background images. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM based on instructions from the performance control microcomputer 91. Then, it executes display control based on the read image data. Note that a VDP (Video Display Processor) may be provided instead of or in addition to the image control one-chip microcomputer 101 of the image control board 100.

The sub-control board 90 (performance control microcomputer 91) outputs various sounds from the speaker 67 via the audio control board 106 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The sounds output from the speaker 67 can be composed of music (BGM), voice, electronic sounds, etc., and the data of the sounds (sound data) is stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. In this embodiment, performance sounds (sound effects), notification sounds, and confirmation sounds are provided as sounds that can be output by the pachinko gaming machine 1 (sounds that can be output from the speaker 67).

The performance sounds include, for example, normal fluctuation BGM (normal fluctuation sound) output in conjunction with the fluctuation display of the performance pattern 8 (fluctuation performance), reach BGM (reach performance sound) output in conjunction with a reach performance, a pattern stop sound output in conjunction with the stop display of the performance pattern 8 (temporary stop and/or confirmed stop), a notice sound output in conjunction with a notice performance, a winning sound output in conjunction with a game ball entering a specific winning hole such as the start hole, general winning hole, or big winning hole, and a jackpot BGM (jackpot performance sound) output in conjunction with a jackpot game performance.

The notification sounds include, for example, a frame open sound that notifies that the frame open detection switch 70 has detected the opening of the front frame 51 (i.e., that the front frame 51 is open), a radio wave detection sound that notifies that the radio wave sensor 71 has detected radio waves, a magnetic detection sound that notifies that the magnetic sensor 72 has detected magnetism, a left hit instruction sound that instructs the player to hit to the left, and a lower tray full sound that notifies that the lower tray 62 is full.

The confirmation sound may be, for example, a volume confirmation sound that indicates (notifies) the player of the volume (volume setting) after a volume setting (adjustment) has been made using a specified volume adjustment operation, or a light intensity confirmation sound that indicates (notifies) the player of the light intensity (light intensity setting) after a light intensity setting (adjustment) has been made based on a specified light intensity adjustment operation.

A CPU may be implemented on the audio control board 106, in which case the CPU may be made to execute audio control. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be implemented on the audio control board 106, in which case audio data may be stored in the ROM. Also, a speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the image control microcomputer 101 may be made to execute audio control. In this case, audio data may be stored in the ROM of the image control board 100.

The sub-control board 90 (performance control microcomputer 91) determines the light pattern data (data that determines the on/off state and light color, etc., and is also called "lamp data") that determines the light emission mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66, the panel lamp 5, and the movable body lamp 15 based on the commands received from the main control board 80 from the data stored in ROM, and controls the lighting of lamps (LEDs) such as the frame lamp 66, the panel lamp 5, and the movable body lamp 15 via the lamp control board 107.

The sub-control board 90 (performance control microcomputer 91) operates the movable performance member 14 (movable body) connected to the lamp control board 107 via the relay board 108 based on commands received from the main control board 80. The movable performance member 14 is operated by an electrical drive source (also called "drive means") such as a motor (not shown). The performance control microcomputer 91 determines (selects) data (also called "drive data") for operating the movable performance member 14 in a predetermined operating mode from multiple operation pattern data stored (memorized) in advance in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, and controls the operation (movable performance) of the movable performance member 14 based on the determined operation pattern data. The movable performance device is composed of the movable performance member 14 and the drive means for operating it.

A CPU may be implemented on the lamp control board 107, in which case the CPU may be made to control the lighting of the lamps and the operation of the movable performance member 14. Furthermore, in this case, a ROM may be implemented on the lamp control board 107, and data regarding the light emission pattern and operation pattern may be stored in the ROM.

A position detection sensor 17 capable of detecting the position of the movable performance member 14 is connected to the sub-control board 90. In this embodiment, the position detection sensor 17 includes a standby position detection sensor 17a (also referred to as the "first position detection sensor" or "first position detection means") that is in a detection state (e.g., "ON") when the movable performance member 14 is in the standby position (initial position) and in a non-detection state (e.g., "OFF") when the movable performance member 14 is not in the standby position, and an actuation position detection sensor 17b (also referred to as the "second position detection sensor" or "second position detection means") that is in a detection state (e.g., "ON") when the movable performance member 14 is in the actuation position and in a non-detection state (e.g., "OFF") when the movable performance member 14 is not in the actuation position. The position detection sensor 17 (standby position detection sensor 17a, actuation position detection sensor 17b) is, for example, a photointerrupter equipped with a light-emitting unit and a light-receiving unit.

A signal indicating the detection state of the standby position detection sensor 17a (also referred to as the "standby position detection signal") and a signal indicating the detection state of the operating position detection sensor 17b (also referred to as the "operating position detection signal") are each input to the sub-control board 90. Based on the input signal, the performance control microcomputer 91 is configured to be able to determine whether the movable performance member 14 is in the standby position or the operating position, i.e., the position (state) of the movable performance member 14, and detect abnormalities in the movable performance member 14.

For example, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in operation (when the power is ON), the standby position detection signal may be OFF (the standby position detection sensor 17a is in a non-detecting state) before the movable performance member 14 is activated (when the movable performance is not being executed) or when the movable performance member 14 starts to operate (when the movable performance starts), or the operating position signal may not be ON (the operating position detection sensor 17b is in a detecting state) or the standby position detection signal may not be ON (the standby position detection sensor 17a is in a non-detecting state) even though a predetermined time (e.g., the time required for the movable performance member 14 to move from the standby position to the operating position) has elapsed since the conditions for moving the movable performance member 14 from the standby position to the operating position (the operating conditions of the movable performance member 14) were met. If the operating status of the movable performance member 14 and the position detection signal (detection state of the position detection sensor 17) do not match, such as if the standby position detection signal remains ON (the standby position detection sensor 17a is in a detection state) or if the operating position detection signal remains ON (the operating position detection sensor 17b is in a detection state) even after a predetermined time (e.g., the time required for the movable performance member 14 to move from the operating position to the standby position) has elapsed since the condition for moving the movable performance member 14 from the operating position to the standby position (the return condition of the movable performance member 14) was met, then it can be determined that an abnormality has occurred in the movable performance member 14 (abnormality in the moving part).

The position detection sensor 17 (either or both of the standby position detection sensor 17a and the operating position detection sensor 17b) is also called the "position detection means", the performance control microcomputer 91 capable of detecting abnormalities in the movable performance member 14 is also called the "abnormality detection means", and either or both of the standby position detection signal and the operating position detection signal are also called the "position detection signal".

The sub-control board 90 is connected to a first effect button detection switch 63c and a second effect button detection switch 63d, which detect when the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b (see FIG. 1) is operated (pushed, rotated, pulled, etc.). When the player performs a specified input operation on the first effect button 63a or the second effect button 63b, a signal from the corresponding effect button detection switch is input to the sub-control board 90. Either or both of the first effect button detection switch 63c and the second effect button detection switch 63d are also referred to as the "effect button detection switch".

[Winning Summary]
Next, an overview of the winning of the pachinko game machine 1 will be described. In this embodiment, there are "jackpot" and "miss" as a result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment. As described above, in the case of a "jackpot", a "jackpot symbol" is displayed in a static manner on the special symbol display section, and in the case of a "miss", a "miss symbol" is displayed in a static manner on the special symbol display section. When the special symbol hit/miss judgment judges that a jackpot has been won, a "special game" is executed in which the big prize opening 30 is opened in an opening pattern according to the type (jackpot type) of the special symbol (jackpot symbol) that has been stopped and displayed. The special game executed when a jackpot has been won is also called a "jackpot game".

The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment is provided with a plurality of jackpots. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, a total of nine types of jackpots are provided, including "10R (round) 1st jackpot", "10R 2nd jackpot", "10R 3rd jackpot", "10R 4th jackpot", "10R 5th jackpot", "5R 6th jackpot", "5R 7th jackpot", "10R 8th jackpot", and "10R 9th jackpot". Of these jackpots, "10R 1st jackpot", "10R 2nd jackpot", "10R 3rd jackpot", "10R 4th jackpot", "10R 5th jackpot", "5R 6th jackpot", and "5R 7th jackpot" are jackpots related to the first special symbol, and "10R 8th jackpot" and "10R 9th jackpot" are jackpots related to the second special symbol. The special symbol display section displays the jackpot symbols corresponding to these jackpot types. In this specification, round may be abbreviated as "R."

The first jackpot in 10R, the eighth jackpot in 10R, and the ninth jackpot in 10R are all jackpots with a round count of "10", the opening time of the large prize slot 30 being "once" for each round from 1R to 10R, and the opening time of the large prize slot 30 being "25 seconds" for each round from 1R to 10R. An opening time of "25 seconds" is also called a "long opening".

The 5R 6th jackpot and 5R 7th jackpot are both jackpots with a round count of "5", the jackpot opening time of the jackpot opening 30 being "1 time" for each round from 1R to 5R, and the jackpot opening time of the jackpot opening 30 being "25 seconds" for each round from 1R to 5R.

The 10R second jackpot is a jackpot where the number of rounds is "10", the number of times the jackpot opening port 30 opens is "1 time" for each round from 1R to 10R, and the opening time of the jackpot opening 30 is "25 seconds" for each round from 1R to 10R.

The 10R 3rd jackpot is a jackpot with 10 rounds, 1 opening of the jackpot opening 30 for each round from 1R to 10R, and 25 seconds for each round from 1R to 7R, and 0.1 seconds for each round from 8R to 10R. An opening time of 0.1 seconds is also called a "short opening." Among the jackpot games related to the 10R 3rd jackpot (also called "10R 3rd jackpot games"), the opening time of the jackpot opening 30 per round from 8R to 10R is an extremely short time of 0.1 seconds, and the possibility of a game ball entering the jackpot opening 30 is extremely low (effectively zero). Therefore, in the 10R 3rd jackpot game, the probability of the game ball entering the large prize opening 30 increases in the 1R to 7R where the opening time per round is "25 seconds", making it possible to easily get the game ball to enter the large prize opening 30. Therefore, the 10R 3rd jackpot is essentially a "7R jackpot", and the 10R 3rd jackpot game is essentially a "7R jackpot game".

The 10R 4th jackpot is a jackpot with 10 rounds, 1 round for the opening of the large prize opening 30, and 25 seconds for each round from 1R to 5R, and 0.1 seconds for each round from 6R to 10R. Among the jackpot games related to the 10R 4th jackpot (also called the "10R 4th jackpot games"), the opening time of the large prize opening 30 per round is extremely short, at 0.1 seconds, from 6R to 10R, and the possibility of the game ball entering the large prize opening 30 is extremely low (effectively zero). For this reason, in the 10R 4th jackpot game, the possibility of the game ball entering the large prize opening 30 is high in the 1R to 5R, where the opening time per round is 25 seconds, making it possible to easily enter the game ball into the large prize opening 30. Therefore, a 10R fourth jackpot is essentially a "5R jackpot," and a 10R fourth jackpot game is essentially a "5R jackpot game."

The 10R 5th jackpot is a jackpot with the number of rounds being "10", the number of times the large prize entry port 30 is opened being "once" for each round from 1R to 10R, and the opening time of the large prize entry port 30 being "25 seconds" for each round from 1R to 3R, and "0.1 seconds" for each round from 4R to 10R. Among the jackpot games related to the 10R 5th jackpot (also called "10R 5th jackpot games"), the opening time of the large prize entry port 30 per round is an extremely short time of "0.1 seconds" for 4R to 10R, and the possibility of the game ball entering the large prize entry port 30 is extremely low (effectively zero). For this reason, in the 10R 4th jackpot game, the possibility of the game ball entering the large prize entry port 30 is high in 1R to 3R, where the opening time per round is "25 seconds", making it possible to easily enter the game ball into the large prize entry port 30. Therefore, a 10R 5th jackpot is essentially a "3R jackpot", and a 10R 5th jackpot game is essentially a "3R jackpot game".

Of these nine types of jackpots, the 10R 1st jackpot, 5R 6th jackpot, 5R 7th jackpot, 10R 8th jackpot, and 10R 9th jackpot have a fixed interval time (for example, about 0.5 seconds to 1 second) set between each round, and each round from the first round to the final round is consumed with the same (fixed) interval time in between. The 10R 1st jackpot, 5R 6th jackpot, 5R 7th jackpot, 10R 8th jackpot, and 10R 9th jackpot, which have rounds consumed in this way, can be said to be general jackpots.

In contrast, for the 10R second and 10R third jackpots (effectively 7R jackpots), the interval times between rounds when the 3rd, 5th and 7th rounds are completed are different from the interval times between rounds when the other rounds (1R, 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 9R) are completed, with the former having a longer interval time than the latter. For example, the interval times between rounds when the 3rd, 5th and 7th rounds are completed are "approximately 3 to 5 seconds," while the interval times between rounds when the other rounds (1R, 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 9R) are completed are "approximately 0.5 to 1 second."

For the 10R fourth jackpot (effectively a 5R jackpot), the interval time between rounds when the 3rd and 5th rounds are completed is different from the interval time between rounds when the other rounds (1R, 2R, 4R, 6R, 7R, 8R, 9R) are completed, with the former interval time being longer than the latter. For example, the interval time between rounds when the 3rd and 5th rounds are completed is "approximately 3 to 5 seconds," while the interval time between rounds when the other rounds (1R, 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 9R) are completed (also called the "second interval time") is "approximately 0.5 to 1 second."

For the 10R 5th jackpot (effectively a 3R jackpot), the interval time between rounds when 3 rounds are completed is different from the interval time between rounds when other rounds are completed (1R, 2R, 4R, 5R, 6R, 7R, 8R, 9R), with the former interval time being longer than the latter. For example, the interval time between rounds when 3 rounds are completed is "approximately 3 to 5 seconds," and the interval time between rounds when other rounds are completed (1R, 2R, 4R, 5R, 6R, 7R, 8R, 9R) is "approximately 0.5 to 1 second."

For the second to fifth jackpots of 10R, the relatively long interval time (e.g., about 3 to 5 seconds) is also called the "first interval time," and the relatively short interval time (e.g., about 0.5 to 1 second) is also called the "second interval time."

Between rounds where the first interval time is set (also called the "interval period"), a presentation indicating whether the large prize opening 30 will be long-opened in the next round as well, i.e., whether a long-open round will be executed (continued), is executed using the image display device 7 (display screen 7a) or the like. The period between rounds where the first interval time is set is also called the "round branching timing", and the presentation executed at the round branching timing is also called the "round branching presentation".

For example, between the rounds (round branching timing) when the third round of the 10R 5th jackpot game ends, a round branching effect is executed that suggests that the long opening round will not be executed (continued) from the next round onwards (for example, a long opening round end effect or a jackpot end effect), and between the rounds (round branching timing) when the third round of the 10R 2nd to 4th jackpot games ends, a round branching effect is executed that suggests that the long opening round will be executed (continued) from the next round onwards (for example, a long opening round continuation effect).

In addition, between the rounds (round branching timing) when the 5th round of the 10R 4th jackpot game ends, a round branching effect is executed that suggests that the long opening round will not be executed (continued) from the next round onwards (for example, a long opening round end effect or a jackpot end effect), and between the rounds (round branching timing) when the 5th round of the 10R 2nd and 3rd jackpot games ends, a round branching effect is executed that suggests that the long opening round will be executed (continued) from the next round onwards (for example, a long opening round continuation effect).

In addition, between rounds (round branching timing) when the 7th round of the 10R third jackpot game ends, a round branching effect is executed that suggests that the long opening round will not be executed (continued) from the next round onwards (for example, a long opening round end effect or a jackpot end effect), and between rounds (round branching timing) when the 7th round of the 10R second jackpot game ends, a round branching effect is executed that suggests that the long opening round will be executed (continued) from the next round onwards (for example, a long opening round continuation effect).

In this way, for the 10R 2nd to 5th jackpots, a longer interval time (first interval time) is set between the rounds that are branching points (round branching timing) for whether or not the long-open round will continue, compared to between the other rounds, and this interval time is used to execute the round branching effect. In this way, the jackpot game for the 10R 2nd to 5th jackpots, where the round branching effect is executed at the round branching timing, is known as a "rank-up bonus", and is a special jackpot with different playability from general jackpots such as the 10R 1st jackpot. Hereinafter, the rank-up bonus may be abbreviated as "RUB".

Here, a round is also called a "round game", and a round game is also called a "prize opening and closing game", "variable ball entry game" or "special ball entry game". In addition, the 5R 6th jackpot and the 5R 7th jackpot are collectively called the "5R jackpot", and the 10R 1st to 5th jackpots and the 10R 8th and 9th jackpots are collectively called the "10R jackpot". Furthermore, the 2nd to 5th jackpots of 10R are also called "special jackpots", jackpots other than the 2nd to 5th jackpots of 10R (the 1st, 8th, and 9th jackpots of 10R, and the 6th and 7th jackpots of 5R) are also called "general jackpots", the jackpot game related to the special jackpot (rank-up bonus (RUB)) is also called "first special game", and the jackpot game related to the general jackpot (5R jackpot game or 10R jackpot game) is also called "second special game".

Furthermore, among the special jackpot patterns (specific display mode, specific display result) that trigger the execution of a jackpot game, the jackpot patterns related to special jackpots (10R second jackpot pattern, 10R third jackpot pattern, 10R fourth jackpot pattern, 10R fifth jackpot pattern) are also called the "first specific display mode" or "first specific display result," and the jackpot patterns related to general jackpots (10R first jackpot pattern, 5R sixth jackpot pattern, 5R seventh jackpot pattern, 10R eighth jackpot pattern, 10R ninth jackpot pattern) are also called the "second specific display mode" or "second specific display result."

In this embodiment, there are two types of jackpots based on the number of rounds: a 5R jackpot and a 10R jackpot. However, it is possible to provide various other types of jackpots, such as three types: a 3R jackpot, a 6R jackpot, and a 10R jackpot, or one type: a 7R jackpot. In this embodiment, the maximum number of rounds in a jackpot game is 10R (10R jackpot), but the maximum number of rounds is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to set the maximum number of rounds to more than 10R (e.g., 15R) or less than 10R (e.g., 9R).

In the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, the game state after the end of the jackpot game is transitioned to a high probability state, time-saving state, high base state, etc., described later, depending on the type of jackpot that has occurred (won). In other words, if the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment is a jackpot and the jackpot is any of the above-mentioned 10R 1st to 5th jackpots, 5R 6th jackpot, and 10R 8th jackpot, the game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to a "high probability state, time-saving state, and high base state" described later (see FIG. 6). On the other hand, if the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment is a jackpot and the jackpot is any of the above-mentioned 5R 7th jackpot and 10R 9th jackpot, the game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to a "low probability state, time-saving state, and high base state" described later (see FIG. 6). For this reason, the 10R 1st to 5th jackpots, the 5R 6th jackpot, and the 10R 8th jackpot can be considered to be "probable jackpots," while the 5R 7th jackpot and the 10R 9th jackpot can be considered to be "non-probable jackpots" (also called "normal jackpots" or "time-saving jackpots").

As shown in Figures 6 and 8(B), when the first special symbol (special symbol 1) is judged to be a hit, the distribution probability of each hit is 5% for 10R 1st hit, 5% for 10R 2nd hit, 7% for 10R 3rd hit, 10% for 10R 4th hit, 13% for 10R 5th hit, 15% for 5R 6th hit, and 45% for 5R 7th hit. In contrast, when the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is judged to be a hit, the distribution probability of each hit is 55% for 10R 8th hit, and 45% for 10R 9th hit. That is, when a jackpot is determined based on the ball entering the second starting hole 21 (special chart 2 hit/miss judgment), the occurrence rate (allocation probability) of a 10R jackpot is 100%, and the occurrence rate (allocation probability) of a 10R jackpot is higher than when a jackpot is determined based on the ball entering the first starting hole 20 (special chart 1 hit/miss judgment). In this way, the pachinko game machine 1 is set so that a jackpot is more likely to be advantageous for a player in terms of the amount of prize balls that can be obtained when a game ball enters the second starting hole 21 and a hit/miss judgment (special chart 2 hit/miss judgment) is performed than when a jackpot is determined based on the ball entering the first starting hole 20 and a hit/miss judgment (special chart 1 hit/miss judgment). For this reason, a player plays the game in the hope of a ball entering the second starting hole 21. This is particularly noticeable when the extended opening function described below is in operation (when a high base state occurs), which increases the frequency of balls hitting the second starting hole 21.

The judgment of whether it is a jackpot or not is made based on the "special symbol hit/miss judgment random number (also called "hit/miss judgment information")", and when the hit/miss judgment result is a jackpot, the judgment of the jackpot type is made based on the "jackpot type determination random number (also called "jackpot type determination information"). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7 (A), the special symbol hit/miss judgment random number takes a value in the range of "0 to 629", and the jackpot type determination random number takes a value in the range of "0 to 99". The special symbol hit/miss judgment random number and the jackpot type determination random number are random numbers (acquired information) obtained based on the ball entering the first start hole 20 or the second start hole 21. As mentioned above, the jackpot type corresponds to the type of jackpot symbol (see FIG. 6). For this reason, the jackpot type determination random number is also called the "symbol determination random number" or "symbol determination information".

The random numbers (acquired information) obtained based on the ball entering the first starting hole 20 or the second starting hole 21 include a random number for determining whether or not a special symbol has been hit, a random number for determining the type of jackpot, and a "random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (also called "fluctuation pattern determination information")" as shown in Figure 7 (A). The random number for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random number for determining the fluctuation pattern including the fluctuation time, and in this embodiment takes a value in the range of "0 to 198".

The random numbers (acquired information) acquired based on the passage of gate 28 include a random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has been drawn, as shown in FIG. 7(B). The random number for determining whether or not a normal symbol has been drawn is a random number for determining whether or not an auxiliary game that opens second starting hole 21 is to be played (a normal symbol lottery), and in this embodiment takes a value in the range of "0 to 240."

[Game Status]
Next, the game states of the pachinko game machine 1 will be explained. The pachinko game machine 1 has a plurality of game states by combinations of the probability variation function and variation time shortening function of the special symbol, the probability variation function and variation time shortening function of the normal symbol, and the opening extension function of the normal electric role object, which are in the activated or deactivated state. The state in which the probability variation function is activated for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is also called the "high probability state" or "probability variable state", and the state in which it is not activated is also called the "low probability state", "normal state", or "non-probability variable state".

In the high probability state, the probability of the special symbol being judged as a jackpot is higher than in the normal state (low probability state). That is, in the normal state, the jackpot determination table for the normal state is used to determine whether or not a hit has occurred, and in the high probability state, the jackpot determination table for the high probability state, in which the value of the special symbol hit determination random number that is judged as a jackpot is higher than in the normal state, is used to determine whether or not a hit has occurred (see Figure 8 (A)). In other words, when the probability variation function for the special symbol is activated, the probability that the result of the special symbol's variable display will be a jackpot (the stopped symbol will be a jackpot symbol) is higher than when it is not activated.

In addition, the state in which the time-saving function for the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is activated is also called the "time-saving state" or "shortened-changing state", and the state in which it is not activated is also called the "non-time-saving state" or "normal-changing state". In the time-saving state, the average value of the special symbol's changing time (the time from the start of the special symbol's changing display to the end (determined display) of the special symbol, also called the "special symbol changing time") is shorter than the average value of the special symbol's changing time in the non-time-saving state. In other words, in the time-saving state, the change pattern is determined using a change pattern table that is set so that a change pattern with a short change time for the special symbol (also called the "shortened-changing pattern") is more likely to be selected than in the non-time-saving state (see Figures 9A and 9B). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of consumption of the special symbol reservation is faster, and effective balls entering the starting hole (balls that can be stored as special symbol reservations) are more likely to occur. Therefore, it is possible to aim for a jackpot under smooth game progress.

The probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) may operate simultaneously, or only one of them may operate. The probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbols operate in sync with the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbols. In other words, the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbols operate in the time-shortening state of the special symbols, and do not operate in the non-time-shortening state. For this reason, in the time-shortening state, the probability of a hit in the normal symbol hit/miss judgment is higher than in the non-time-shortening state. Specifically, in the time-shortening state, the normal symbol hit/miss judgment (normal symbol judgment) is performed using a normal symbol hit judgment table in which the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) that is judged as a hit is greater than the normal symbol hit judgment table used in the non-time-shortening state (see Figure 8 (C)).

In the time-saving state, the normal pattern change time (the time from the start of the normal pattern change display to the end (confirmed display) of the normal pattern change, also called the "normal pattern change time") is shorter than in the non-time-saving state. In this embodiment, the normal pattern change time in the non-time-saving state is 30 seconds, and the normal pattern change time in the time-saving state is 1 second (see Figure 8 (D)). Also, in the time-saving state, the opening time extension function of the variable winning device 22 (second starting hole 21) is activated, and the opening time of the second starting hole 21 in the auxiliary play (game with a normal pattern hit) is longer than in the non-time-saving state. In addition, in the time-saving state, the opening count increase function of the variable winning device 22 is activated, and the number of times the second starting hole 21 is opened in the auxiliary play is greater than in the non-time-saving state. Specifically, when the normal symbol hit/miss judgment is a hit in the non-time-saving state, the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22 (second starting hole 21) performs one 0.2-second opening operation, and when the normal symbol hit/miss judgment is a hit in the time-saving state, the movable member 23 of the variable winning device 22 (second starting hole 21) performs three 2.0-second opening operations.

When the probability variation function and variation time reduction function for normal symbols, as well as the opening time extension function and opening count increase function of the variable winning device 22 are operating, the second starting hole 21 opens more frequently and the frequency with which game balls enter the second starting hole 21 increases compared to when these functions are not operating. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of winning balls to the number of shot balls, becomes higher. Therefore, the state in which these functions are operating is also called the "high base state" or "high frequency state," and the state in which they are not operating is also called the "low base state." In the high base state, you can aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing the game balls you have in hand (held balls).

The high base state (high frequency state) does not necessarily require all of the above functions to be activated. In other words, it is sufficient that the activation of at least one of the probability fluctuation function and fluctuation time reduction function for normal symbols, and the opening time extension function and opening count increase function of the variable winning device 22 makes it easier for the second starting hole 21 to open (higher ball entry frequency) compared to when the function is not activated. The high base state may also be controlled independently without being associated with the time reduction state for special symbols. The function that generates such a high base state is also called the "high base generation function."

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, when any of the 10R 1st to 5th jackpots, 5R 6th jackpot, and 10R 8th jackpot occurs, the game state after the jackpot game (after the special game) becomes a high probability state of the special symbol, a time-saving state of the special symbol, and a high base state (see FIG. 6). This game state is also called the "high probability high base state." The high probability high base state ends when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner a predetermined number of times, or when a jackpot is hit and a jackpot game is played. This high probability high base state becomes what is known as a "probability change state" for the player.

In addition, when either the 5R 7th jackpot or the 10R 9th jackpot occurs, the game state after the jackpot game (after the special game) will be the normal state (low probability state) of the special pattern, as well as the time-saving state and high base state of the special pattern (see Figure 6). This game state is also called the "low probability high base state." The low probability high base state ends when the special pattern is displayed in a variable manner a predetermined number of times (e.g. 100 times) or when a jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed.

The "low probability high base state" is also referred to as the "first gaming state," and the "high probability high base state" is also referred to as the "second gaming state." In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, three gaming states can be set as gaming states: "low probability low base state," "low probability high base state," and "high probability high base state." In addition, it may be possible to set a high probability state for special symbols, a non-time-saving state for special symbols, and a low base state, i.e., a "high probability low base state."

In a high base state such as a low-probability high base state or a high-probability high base state, it is more advantageous to advance the game by hitting the ball to the right play area 3B. In a high base state, the second start hole 21 is more easily opened than in a low base state, and it is easier to enter the second start hole 21 than the first start hole 20 (the second start hole is more likely to enter the ball than the first start hole). For this reason, the ball is hit to the right to enter the second start hole 21 while passing through the gate 28, which is the trigger for determining whether the normal symbol is a hit or not. This allows more start balls to be entered (opportunities to determine whether the special symbol is a hit or not) than when hitting to the left. In this state, the launch direction indicator 47 is controlled to light in a predetermined manner, and notifies the player that the game ball should be launched toward the right play area 3B (right hit instruction notification).

In contrast, in a low base state (e.g., a low-probability low base state), it is more advantageous to play by hitting the ball from the left into the left play area 3A. In a low base state, the second start hole 21 is less likely to open than in a high base state, and it is easier to hit the ball into the first start hole 20 than into the second start hole 21 (the first start hole is more likely to have a ball enter than the second start hole). For this reason, the ball is hit from the left in order to have the ball enter the first start hole 20. This allows for more start holes (opportunities to determine whether or not the special symbol has been hit) compared to hitting from the right. In this state, the launch direction indicator 47 is controlled to light up (display controlled) in a predetermined manner, and notifies the player that the ball should be launched toward the left play area 3A (left hit instruction notification).

The launch direction indicator 47 has two LEDs, "yz", and can indicate the launch direction by turning on the LEDs depending on the game state. For example, in a low base state, it can indicate that the ball should be launched into the left game area by displaying "y□z□" (e.g., □: off, ■: on) with both LEDs off. In a high base state, it can indicate that the ball should be launched into the right game area by displaying "y■z■" (e.g., □: off, ■: on).

As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, if the low-probability low base state in which no jackpot game is being played is used as a reference, this low-probability low base state can be regarded as a "normal game state", and the game in which the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner in this state (variable game) can be regarded as a "normal game". On the other hand, since the high-probability high base state and the low-probability high base state are game states that are more advantageous to the player than the low-probability low base state, these high-probability high base states and low-probability high base states can be regarded as "special game states", and the game in which the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner in this state can be regarded as a "special game".

In addition, a jackpot game is a game that can be executed by varying the display of a special symbol and stopping the display of the jackpot symbol, and since the player can win a large number of prize balls by having the game ball enter the large prize opening 30, a game state in which a jackpot game is played can be said to be a game state that is more advantageous to the player than a game state in which a jackpot game is not played. For this reason, a game state in which a jackpot game is played can be considered a "special game state", and a jackpot game played in that state can be considered a "special game".

In addition, low base states such as a low-probability low base state and a high-probability low base state are game states in which the game progresses by hitting the game ball into the left game area 3A with a left hit, as described above, so the low base state can be regarded as a "left hit state." On the other hand, high base states such as a low-probability high base state and a high-probability high base state, and a state in which a jackpot game is played in which the game ball enters the big prize hole, are game states in which the game progresses by hitting the game ball into the right game area 3B with a right hit, as described above, so the high base state and the jackpot game state can be regarded as a "right hit state." As described above, in the high base state (right-hand hitting state), the second starting hole 21 is more easily opened than in the low base state (left-hand hitting state), and the game ball can enter the second starting hole 21 more easily than the first starting hole 20. Also, it is set so that the player is more likely to win the jackpot based on the second special symbol being determined based on the game ball entering the second starting hole 21 than the first special symbol being determined based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 20. For this reason, the left-hand hitting state can be considered as a "normal game state", and the game in which the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in this state (variable game) can be considered as a "normal game". In addition, the right-hand hitting state, which is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the left-hand hitting state, can be considered as a "special game state", and the game in which the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner in this state (variable game) can be considered as a "special game".

In addition, when compared to a low-probability, low-base state, the high-probability, low-base state is the same in that both are low-base states; however, in the high-probability state, the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, and the probability that the result of the variable display of the special symbol will be a jackpot is higher than in the low-probability state. Therefore, the high-probability, low-base state, which is a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the low-probability, low-base state, can be considered a "special game state," and the game in which the variable display of the special symbol in this state (variable game) can be considered a "special game."

The control related to the setting and transition of the various game states described above is performed by the main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81). The main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81), which controls the activation/deactivation of the probability fluctuation function, functions as a probability setting means that can set the winning probability (jackpot probability) of the special symbol hit/miss judgment to a low probability (first probability) or a high probability (second probability). The main control board 80 (game control microcomputer 81), which controls the activation/deactivation of the fluctuation time reduction function, also functions as a shortened fluctuation state setting means (time reduction state setting means) that can set a shortened fluctuation state (time reduction state) in which the fluctuation time of the special symbol is shorter than usual.

[Main control main processing]
Next, the operation (control processing by the main control unit 80) of the game control microcomputer 81 (game control means) will be described with reference to Figures 10 to 36. Note that counters, flags, status, buffers, etc. that appear in the description of the operation of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the RAM of the main control board 80. Also, in this specification, "S" such as S101 ("S" in the flowchart) means a step.

When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 81 reads out the main control main processing program shown in FIG. 10 from the ROM of the main control board 80 and executes it. As shown in the figure, the main control main processing first performs initial settings (S101). The initial settings include, for example, stack settings, constant settings, interrupt time settings, CPU settings of the main control board 80, settings of SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller), and resetting of various flags, statuses, and counters. The initial value of the flag is "0" or "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The initial settings (S101) are performed only once after the power is turned on (when the power is turned on) and are not performed thereafter.

In addition, if a RAM clear switch (not shown) is pressed when the pachinko game machine 1 is powered on, i.e., if the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch pressed, the RAM (also called the "predetermined memory area") of the main control board 80 is initialized and a RAM clear command is sent to the sub-control board 90. Initialization of the RAM is also called "RAM clear." The power-on switch (power switch) is provided on the power supply board 109 (see FIG. 2), and the RAM clear switch is provided near the power switch. Such initialization of the RAM of the main control board 80 (RAM clear) corresponds to one aspect of "initialization processing for initializing the memory contents of the predetermined memory area," and the game control microcomputer 81 that executes the initialization (initialization processing) of the RAM of the main control board 80 corresponds to one aspect of "initialization processing execution means."

Following the initial setting (S101), interrupts are prohibited (S102), and the normal and special symbol main random number update process (S103) is executed. In the normal and special symbol main random number update process (S103), the values of the various random number counters shown in FIG. 7 are updated by incrementing them by 1. When the value of each random number counter reaches its upper limit, it returns to "0" and is incremented again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", and may be changed randomly. The updated random number counter values (random number values) are stored sequentially in a specified update value storage area (not shown) in the RAM of the main control board 80.

When the normal and special symbol main random number update process (S103) is completed, an interrupt is permitted (S104). While the interrupt is permitted, the interrupt process (S105) can be executed. The interrupt process (S105) is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the CPU of the main control board 80 at a cycle of, for example, 4 ms. Then, after the interrupt process (S105) is completed and before the next interrupt process (S105) is started, the update process of various counter values by the normal and special symbol main random number update process (S103) is repeatedly executed. Note that if an interrupt pulse is input to the CPU when the interrupt is prohibited, the interrupt process (S105) does not start immediately, but starts after the interrupt is permitted (S104).

[Interrupt handling]
Next, the interrupt process (S105) will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, in the interrupt process (S105), first, the output process (S201) is executed. In the output process (S201), commands and the like set in the output buffer provided in the RAM of the main control board 80 in each process described below are output (transmitted) to the sub-control board 90, the dispensing control board 110, and the like. The command is, for example, made up of 2 bytes of information, in which case the upper byte is information about the type of command, and the lower byte is information about the content of the command. The information contained in the commands that can be output (transmitted) from the main control board 80 includes, for example, information on the game status (also referred to as "game status information"), information on the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment (also referred to as "hit/miss judgment result information"), information on the type of jackpot (type of jackpot symbol) (also referred to as "jackpot type information" or "jackpot symbol information"), information on the number of reserved special symbols (reserved number) (also referred to as "storage information" or "reserved number information"), information on the fluctuation pattern of the special symbols (also referred to as "fluctuation pattern information"), and information on the result of the pre-judgment described below (also referred to as "pre-judgment result information"). The game control microcomputer 81 that executes the output process (S201) functions as an "information transmitting means".

In the input process (S202) that follows the output process (S201), the detection signals detected by the various sensors (first start hole sensor 20a, second start hole sensor 21a, big prize hole sensor 30a, etc.) attached to the pachinko game machine 1 are read and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as prize ball information. In addition, a detection signal from a lower tray full detection sensor (not shown) that detects whether the lower tray 62 is full is also taken in and stored in the output buffer of the RAM as lower tray full data.

The normal and special symbol main random number update process (S203) that is performed next is the same as the normal and special symbol main random number update process (S103) that is performed in the main control main process of Figure 10. That is, the update process of the various random number counter values (including the normal symbol random number counter value) shown in Figure 7 is performed both during the execution period of the timer interrupt process (S105) and during other periods (the period from the end of the interrupt process (S105) until the start of the next interrupt process (S105)).

Following the normal and special symbol main random number update process (S203), the start hole sensor detection process (S204), start ball entry process (S205), normal symbol operation process (S206), special symbol operation process (S207), reserved ball count process (S208), and power cut monitoring process (S209) are executed. After that, other processes not closely related to the present invention (S210) are executed, and the interrupt process (S105) is terminated. Then, the main control main process S102 to S104 are repeatedly executed (see FIG. 10) until the next interrupt pulse is input to the CPU of the main control board 80, and when the interrupt pulse is input (about 4 ms later), the interrupt process (S105) is executed again. In the output process (S201) of the interrupt process (S105) executed again, the commands set in the output buffer of the RAM in the previous interrupt process (S105) are output.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
12, in the start gate sensor detection process (S204), first, it is determined whether the game ball has passed through the gate 28, that is, whether the game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 28a (S301). If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (NO in S301), the process proceeds to S305, and if the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (YES in S301), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls with normal symbols (the number of reserved normal symbols, specifically, the value of a counter that counts the number of reserved normal symbols provided in the RAM) is less than 4 (S302).

If the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is not less than four (NO in S302), the process proceeds to S305. On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls for normal symbols is less than four (YES in S302), "1" is added to the number of reserved balls for normal symbols (S303), and the process of obtaining a random number for normal symbols (S304) is performed. In the process of obtaining a random number for normal symbols (S304), the value of the random number counter for determining whether or not a normal symbol has been selected (label-TRND-H, see FIG. 7(B)) stored in the update value memory area (not shown) of the RAM is obtained, and the obtained random number value (obtained information) is stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved balls for normal symbols in the reserved ball memory section provided in the RAM of the main control board 80.

In S305, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the second start hole 21, i.e., whether a game ball has been detected by the second start hole sensor 21a (S305). If a game ball has not entered the second start hole 21 (NO in S305), the process proceeds to S309. If a game ball has entered the second start hole 21 (YES in S305), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 (the number of reserved second special charts, specifically, the value of the counter that counts the number of reserved second special charts provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80) is less than 4 (upper limit) (S306). If the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 is not less than 4 (NO in S306), the process proceeds to S309. If the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 is less than 4 (YES in S306), 1 is added to the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 (S307).

Next, a special pattern 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) is performed. In the special pattern 2 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special pattern hit/miss determination random number counter (label-TRND-A) (also called the "special pattern hit/miss determination random number value"), the value of the jackpot type determination random number counter (label-TRND-AS) (also called the "jackpot type determination random number value"), and the value of the fluctuation pattern determination random number counter (label-TRND-T1) (also called the "fluctuation pattern determination random number value") stored in the update value memory area (not shown) of the RAM are acquired (i.e., the values of each random number shown in FIG. 7 (A) are acquired), and these acquired random number values (acquired information) are stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of special pattern 2 reserved balls in the second special pattern reserved memory unit. In other words, when the number of reserved balls for special pattern 2 is less than four and the game ball enters the second starting hole 21, the condition for acquiring the special pattern 2 related random number (acquisition condition) is met, and this triggers the acquisition of the value of the special pattern 2 related random number (random number value for determining whether or not the special pattern has been won, the random number value for determining the type of jackpot, and the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern) and stores it as the second special pattern reserved (reserved information).

Next, it is determined whether a game ball has entered the first starting hole 20, i.e., whether a game ball has been detected by the first starting hole sensor 20a (S309). If a game ball has not entered the first starting hole 20 (NO in S309), the process is terminated. If a game ball has entered the first starting hole 20 (YES in S309), it is determined whether the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 (the number of reserved first special charts, specifically, the value of a counter that counts the number of reserved first special charts provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80) is less than 4 (upper limit) (S310). Then, if the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 is not less than 4 (NO in S310), the process is terminated. However, if the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 is less than 4 (YES in S310), "1" is added to the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 (S311).

Next, the special chart 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) is performed. In the special chart 1 related random number acquisition process (S312), as in the special chart 2 related random number acquisition process (S308), the value of the special pattern hit/miss determination counter (label-TRND-A) (random number value for special pattern hit/miss determination), the value of the jackpot type determination random number counter (label-TRND-AS) (random number value for jackpot type determination), and the value of the fluctuation pattern determination random number counter (label-TRND-T1) (random number value for fluctuation pattern determination) stored in the update value memory area (not shown) of the RAM are acquired (i.e., the values of each random number shown in FIG. 7 (A) are acquired), and these acquired random number values are stored in the address space corresponding to the current number of reserved balls for special chart 1 in the first special chart reserved memory unit. In other words, when the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 is less than four and the game ball enters the first starting hole 20, the condition for acquiring the special chart 1 related random number (acquisition condition) is met, and this triggers the acquisition of the value of the special chart 1 related random number (random number value for determining whether the special pattern has been won, random number value for determining the type of jackpot, random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern) and stores it as the first special chart reserved (reserved information).

The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81), which executes the special chart 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) and the special chart 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) in the above start port sensor detection process (S204), functions as an "acquisition means."

[Processing at the start of the ball entry]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the start ball entry process (S205) following the start ball entry sensor detection process (S204). As shown in FIG. 13, in the start ball entry process (S205), first, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 has increased by "1" (S315). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 has increased by "1" (YES in S315), the process proceeds to S316. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 in S307 of the start ball entry sensor detection process (S204) based on the game ball entering the second start ball. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 has not increased (NO in S315), the process proceeds to S319.

In S316, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) acquired in the special pattern 2 related random number acquisition process (S308) of the immediately preceding start port sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the second special pattern reserved memory unit is read (S316). Next, the acquired random number value related to the read second special pattern (second special pattern reserved random number value) is determined (S317).

In S317, the random number value read in S316 is used to determine whether the winning combination is a jackpot or not, and if the result of the determination is a jackpot, the type of jackpot is determined based on the random number value used to determine the type of jackpot.

The hit/miss determination by S317 corresponds to a pre-determination (so-called "reserve pre-reading") of the hit/miss determination for the second special chart reserved that is the subject of the determination, made prior to the special chart 2 hit/miss determination process (S1202) described below. In other words, the result of the hit/miss determination made when the second special chart reserved is consumed (whether it is a hit or miss) is determined (pre-read) prior to the special chart 2 hit/miss determination process (S1202) described below.

The determination of the jackpot type by S317 corresponds to a pre-determination (pre-reading of reserve) of the jackpot type for the second special reserve that is the subject of the determination, which is a reserve that will result in a jackpot (also called a "jackpot reserve"), prior to the special chart 2 hit/miss determination process (S1202) described below. In other words, if the result of the hit/miss determination performed when the second special reserve is consumed is a jackpot, the type of the jackpot is determined (pre-read) prior to the special chart 2 hit/miss determination process (S1202) described below. Note that the determination of the jackpot type by S317 is also a determination of the jackpot pattern. In other words, it is also a determination (pre-reading) of the jackpot pattern that will be determined when the second special reserve (jackpot reserve) that will result in a jackpot is consumed, prior to the special chart 2 hit/miss determination process (S1202) described below.

In addition, in S317, the fluctuation pattern is determined based on the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern among the acquired random numbers read in S316. The determination of the fluctuation pattern by S317 corresponds to a pre-determination (reservation pre-reading) of the selection of the fluctuation pattern for the second special chart reservation that is the subject of the determination, prior to the special chart 2 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1203) described below. In other words, the fluctuation pattern that will be selected (determined) when the second special chart reservation is consumed is determined (pre-read) prior to the special chart 2 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1203) described below.

The advance judgment of whether or not the win is a jackpot (S317) can be performed, for example, by comparing the random number value for special symbol win/loss judgment read out in S316 with the random number value for special symbol win/loss judgment (win/loss judgment value) in the jackpot judgment table shown in FIG. 8 (A), that is, the jackpot judgment table for high probability state if the game state at the time of reserved consumption is a high probability state, and the jackpot judgment table for normal state if it is a normal state (low probability state). In this case, if the random number value for special symbol win/loss judgment read out in S316 matches the jackpot judgment value (jackpot judgment value) among the win/loss judgment values in the jackpot judgment table, the advance judgment of whether or not the win is a jackpot, and if they do not match, the advance judgment of whether or not the win is a miss.

The pre-determination of the jackpot type (S317) can be performed, for example, by comparing the random number value for determining the jackpot type read in S316 with the random number value for determining the jackpot type (jackpot type determination value) in the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8 (B), that is, the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol if the reserved special symbol to be determined is the first special symbol, and the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol if the reserved special symbol is the second special symbol. In this case, the random number value for determining the jackpot type read in S316 matches one of the jackpot type determination values in the jackpot type determination table, and the jackpot type corresponding to the matching jackpot type determination value becomes the pre-determination result of the jackpot type.

The preliminary determination of the fluctuation pattern (S317) can be performed, for example, based on the fluctuation pattern tables shown in Figures 9A and 9B, that is, if the game state at the time of reserved consumption is a non-time-saving state, the fluctuation pattern table for the non-time-saving state shown in Figure 9A, and if it is a time-saving state, the fluctuation pattern table for the time-saving state shown in Figure 9B. This can be performed by comparing the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern read out in S316 with the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern determination value) in the fluctuation pattern table according to the preliminary determination result of whether or not it is a win or a loss (jackpot or loss). In this case, the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern read out in S316 matches one of the fluctuation pattern determination values in the fluctuation pattern table according to the preliminary determination result of whether or not it is a win or a loss (jackpot or loss). The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the matching fluctuation pattern determination value becomes the preliminary determination result of the fluctuation pattern.

Next, in S318, command data including information (pre-determination result information) on the result of the pre-determination by S317 (pre-determination of the second special chart reservation), specifically, information that can identify the pre-determination result of whether or not it is a hit (also called "pre-determination result information of whether or not it is a hit"), information that can identify the pre-determination result of the jackpot type (also called "pre-determination result information of the jackpot type"), and information that can identify the pre-determination result of the fluctuation pattern (also called "pre-determination result information of the fluctuation pattern"), is generated as a special chart 2 start ball entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S318). Note that the special chart 2 start ball entry command may include information indicating a part or all of the special chart 2 acquisition random number value read in S316 as pre-determination result information.

By analyzing the special chart 2 start ball entry command sent from the main control unit 80 (output by the output process (S201)) by the sub-control unit 90, it becomes possible for the sub-control unit 90 to determine whether the information is related to a jackpot, what the jackpot type is, what the fluctuation pattern is, etc. In other words, the sub-control unit 90 (microcomputer 91 for performance control) can execute a predetermined performance (also called a "predetermined performance") based on the pre-judgment result information specified by the received special chart 2 start ball entry command, and functions as a "predetermined performance execution means". This is also true when the sub-control unit 90 receives the special chart 1 start ball entry command described below. Either or both of the special chart 1 start ball entry command and the special chart 2 start ball entry command are also referred to as "start ball entry commands". As a performance (predetermined performance) based on the pre-judgment result information specified by the start ball entry command, for example, a performance (preview performance) that suggests the possibility (expectation) of a jackpot or a fluctuation pattern, etc. can be executed.

Next, in S319, similar to the process related to Special Chart 2 described above, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls for Special Chart 1 has increased by "1" (S319). If it is determined that the number of reserved balls for Special Chart 1 has increased by "1" (YES in S319), the process proceeds to S320. This corresponds to the case where "1" is added to the number of reserved balls for Special Chart 1 in S311 of the start hole sensor detection process (S204) based on a game ball entering the first start hole. On the other hand, if it is determined in S319 that the number of reserved balls for Special Chart 1 has not increased (NO in S319), the process ends as it is.

In S320, it is determined whether the time-saving flag is ON (S320), and if it is determined that the time-saving flag is ON, i.e., that the base state is high (YES in S320), this process ends without performing the processes in S321 and onwards. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time-saving flag is OFF, i.e., that the base state is low (NO in S320), the process proceeds to the pre-determination processes in S321 and onwards.

Here, when the time-saving flag is ON, that is, when the current game state is in a high base state, the opening extension function that increases the frequency of balls entering the second starting hole 21 is activated, and the state is such that the hit/miss judgment of the special symbol 2 (the hit/miss judgment of the second special symbol) is easily performed. In addition, in this embodiment, as described later, the consumption of the second special symbol reservation (the change display of the second special symbol) is executed in priority to the consumption of the first special symbol reservation (the change display of the first special symbol) (so-called special symbol 2 priority variable machine). In such a configuration, for example, if a pre-judgment of the special symbol 1 is performed, the result is notified to the player by a performance such as a notice, and the result of the pre-judgment is clearly indicated as a jackpot, the player can use the priority consumption of the second special symbol reservation (priority change of the second special symbol) to intentionally eliminate the second special symbol reservation at any timing (set it to "0"), and intentionally generate a jackpot related to the special symbol 1 for which the result of the pre-judgment was indicated. It is not preferable from the viewpoint of fairness of the game that the player can adjust the timing of the jackpot occurrence in this way. For this reason, if the current game state is not a low base state but a high base state (YES in S320), the process related to the pre-determination of special chart 1 from S321 onwards is not performed and this process is terminated.

The processing of S321 to S323 is the same as the processing of S316 to S318 described above, but for special symbol 1. That is, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) acquired in the special symbol 1 related random number acquisition process (S312) in the start hole sensor detection process (S204) and stored in the first special symbol reserved memory unit is read (S321), and a preliminary judgment is made on the acquired random number value related to the read first special symbol (random number value of the first special symbol reserved) (S322).

In the advance judgment by S322 (advance judgment of the first special chart reserved), similar to the advance judgment by S317 (advance judgment of the second special chart reserved), advance judgment of hit/miss, advance judgment of the type of jackpot, and advance judgment of the fluctuation pattern are performed. Of the advance judgments by S322, the advance judgment of hit/miss and advance judgment of the type of jackpot are performed prior to the special chart 1 hit/miss judgment process (S1207) described below, and the advance judgment of the fluctuation pattern is performed prior to the special chart 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1208) described below.

The advance determination of hit/miss, advance determination of jackpot type, and advance determination of fluctuation pattern by S322 can be performed in the same manner as the advance determination of hit/miss, advance determination of jackpot type, and advance determination of fluctuation pattern by S317 described above, based on the jackpot determination table (see FIG. 8(A)), jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 8(B)), and fluctuation pattern table (see FIG. 9A, FIG. 9B), respectively. Therefore, a detailed explanation of the advance determination of hit/miss, advance determination of jackpot type, and advance determination of fluctuation pattern by S322 will be omitted.

Then, command data including information (preliminary judgment result information) on the result of the preliminary judgment by S322 (preliminary judgment of the first special drawing reservation) is generated as a special drawing 1 start entry command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S323). The special drawing 1 start entry command is the same as the special drawing 2 start entry command described above. Therefore, a detailed explanation of the special drawing 1 start entry command will be omitted.

The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) which executes the processes of S317 and S322 in the above-mentioned start ball entry process (S205) functions as a "judgment means". In addition, the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) which executes the preliminary judgment (S322) of the special chart 1 acquired random number value (acquired information) acquired based on the ball entering the first start hole 20 functions as a "first judgment means", and the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) which executes the preliminary judgment (S317) of the special chart 2 acquired random number value (acquired information) acquired based on the ball entering the second start hole 21 functions as a "second judgment means".

Here, the variation pattern table used in the preliminary determination of the variation pattern (S317, S322) and the variation pattern selection process (S1203, S1208) described later will be described with reference to Figs. 9A and 9B. In this embodiment, the variation pattern table includes a variation pattern table for a non-time-saving state (also called the "first variation pattern table") used when the game state when the variation game (variable display of special symbols) is executed is a non-time-saving state, and a variation pattern table for a time-saving state (also called the "second variation pattern table") used when the game state when the variation game is executed is a time-saving state. Fig. 9A shows an example of a variation pattern table for a non-time-saving state (first variation pattern table), and Fig. 9B shows an example of a variation pattern table for a time-saving state (second variation pattern table). Note that the data structure of the variation pattern table and the types (contents) and numbers of variation patterns defined in the variation pattern table are not limited to those shown in this embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate according to the playability and specifications of the pachinko game machine.

The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment has three game states in which variable play can be executed: a low-probability low base state, a low-probability high base state, and a high-probability high base state, and is controlled to one of the game states in the variable play state. The low base state (low-probability low base state) is a state (left-hitting state) in which the game is played by hitting the ball to the left with the aim of entering the first starting hole 20, and is a game state in which the game of displaying the first special symbol in a variable manner (also called the "first variable play") is the main game state, and is also a non-time-saving state in which the variable time-saving function is not activated. For this reason, the variable pattern table for the non-time-saving state (first variable pattern table) shown in FIG. 9A is mainly used when determining (judging) the variable pattern of the variable display of the first special symbol in the low base state. However, although the possibility is low, if a change in the second special symbol is displayed due to a game ball entering the second starting hole 21 in a low base state, the first change pattern table is used to display the change in the second special symbol.

On the other hand, the high base state (low probability high base state, high probability high base state) is a state (right hit state) in which the game is played by hitting the ball to the right with the aim of landing the ball in the second starting hole 21, and the game mainly involves the variable display of the second special symbol (also called the "second variable game"). Since the high base state is also a time-saving state in which the variable time shortening function is activated, the variable pattern table for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 9B (second variable pattern table) is mainly used in determining (judging) the variable pattern of the variable display of the second special symbol in the high base state. However, although the possibility is low, if the variable display of the first special symbol is executed due to the game ball entering the first starting hole 20 in the high base state, the second variable pattern table is used for the variable display of the first special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 9A, the first variation pattern table covers variation patterns P1 to P10. In the first variation pattern table, a variation pattern determining random number value (random number range) is set for each of the variation patterns P1 to P10 as a judgment value (also called a "variation pattern judgment value") for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol variation display. Of the variation patterns P1 to P10, variation patterns P1 to P3 are jackpot variation patterns that can be selected when the result of the hit/miss judgment is a jackpot, and variation patterns P4 to P10 are miss variation patterns that can be selected when the result of the hit/miss judgment is a miss. The variation pattern judgment value is also called "judgment information."

Fluctuation patterns P1, P2, P4, and P5 are fluctuation patterns with a fluctuation time of 75,000 ms, fluctuation patterns P3 and P6 are fluctuation patterns with a fluctuation time of 45,000 ms, fluctuation pattern P7 is a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 30,000 ms, fluctuation pattern P8 is a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 12,000 ms, fluctuation pattern P9 is a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 4,000 ms, and fluctuation pattern P10 is a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 2,000 ms. The contents of each of these fluctuation patterns (the contents of the fluctuation performance executed based on each fluctuation pattern) are as shown in Figure 9A, and will be described in detail later.

The fluctuation pattern judgment value corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns P1 to P3 (jackpot fluctuation patterns) is the same regardless of the number of special reserved balls (1 to 4) when the fluctuation display starts. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern judgment value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern P1 is "0 to 74" regardless of the number of special reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts, the fluctuation pattern judgment value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern P2 is "75 to 149" regardless of the number of special reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts, and the fluctuation pattern judgment value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern P3 is "150 to 198" regardless of the number of special reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts.

The fluctuation pattern judgment value corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns P4 to P7 (missing fluctuation patterns) may be the same regardless of the number of special reserved balls (1 to 4) when the fluctuation display starts, or it may be different depending on the number of special reserved balls (1 to 4) when the fluctuation display starts.

Specifically, the fluctuation pattern judgment value corresponding to fluctuation pattern P4 is "0 to 3" regardless of the number of balls reserved for the special chart when the fluctuation display starts, and the fluctuation pattern judgment value corresponding to fluctuation pattern P5 is "4 to 7" regardless of the number of balls reserved for the special chart when the fluctuation display starts. In other words, the fluctuation pattern judgment value corresponding to fluctuation pattern P4 and the fluctuation pattern judgment value corresponding to fluctuation pattern P5 are both the same regardless of the number of balls reserved for the special chart when the fluctuation display starts.

The fluctuation pattern judgment value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern P6 is "8 to 20" when the number of reserved balls on the special chart when the fluctuation display starts is "1 or 2", and is "8 to 17" when the number of reserved balls on the special chart when the fluctuation display starts is "3" or "4". In other words, the fluctuation pattern judgment value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern P6 differs depending on the number of reserved balls on the special chart when the fluctuation display starts.

The fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to fluctuation pattern P7 is "21 to 38" when the number of special reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "1 or 2", "18 to 38" when the number of special reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "3", and "18 to 33" when the number of special reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "4". In other words, the fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to fluctuation pattern P7 differs depending on the number of special reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts.

The fluctuation pattern judgment value corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns P8 to P10 (miss fluctuation pattern) may or may not be set depending on the number of special reserved balls (1 to 4) when the fluctuation display starts.

Specifically, the fluctuation pattern judgment value corresponding to fluctuation pattern P8 is set to "39 to 198" when the number of special reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "1 or 2", and is not set when the number of special reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "3" or "4". In other words, the fluctuation pattern judgment value corresponding to fluctuation pattern P8 is set when the number of special reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "1 or 2", and is not set when the number of special reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "3" or "4". For this reason, for example, in a non-time-saving state, if the result of the first special pattern hit/miss judgment is a miss and the number of special reserved balls for the first special pattern when the fluctuation display starts is "3" or "4", fluctuation pattern P8 does not appear.

The fluctuation pattern judgment value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern P9 is set to "39 to 198" when the number of special reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "3", and is not set when the number of special reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "1 or 2" or "4". In other words, the fluctuation pattern judgment value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern P9 is set when the number of special reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "3", and is not set when the number of special reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "1 or 2" or "4". For this reason, for example, in a non-time-saving state, if the result of the first special pattern hit/miss judgment is a miss and the number of special reserved balls for the first special pattern when the fluctuation display starts is "1", "2", or "4", fluctuation pattern P9 does not appear.

The fluctuation pattern judgment value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern P10 is set to "34 to 198" when the number of special reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "4", and is not set when the number of special reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "1 or 2" or "3". In other words, the fluctuation pattern judgment value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern P10 is set when the number of special reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "4", and is not set when the number of special reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "1 or 2" or "3". For this reason, for example, in a non-time-saving state, if the result of the first special pattern hit/miss judgment is a miss and the number of special reserved balls for the first special pattern when the fluctuation display starts is "1", "2", or "3", fluctuation pattern P9 does not appear.

According to such a first fluctuation pattern table, for example, when a game ball enters the first start hole 20 (also called the "first start ball entry") in a non-time-saving state (low-probability, low-base state), even if the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 when the advance determination (S322) of the fluctuation pattern related to the first start ball entry is made differs from the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 when the special chart 1 fluctuation pattern selection process (S1208) related to the first start ball entry is made (when the fluctuation display begins), there will be no inconsistency between the presentation based on the result of the advance determination (special chart 1 start ball entry command) related to the first start ball entry and the fluctuation pattern determined at the start of the fluctuation, for fluctuation patterns P1 to P3 (jackpot fluctuation patterns) and fluctuation patterns P4 and P5 (miss fluctuation patterns).

That is, for example, in a non-time-saving state (low probability, low base state), if the first start ball hits when variable play is not being performed, the number of reserved balls in special chart 1 changes from "0" to "1" due to the occurrence of the first start ball hit, and the number of reserved balls in special chart 1 immediately after the first start ball hit is "1". The number of reserved balls in special chart immediately after the start ball hit is also called the "reserved number at the time of start ball hit". After that, the variable display based on the first start ball hit (the start ball hit when variable play is not being performed) starts immediately, so the number of reserved balls in special chart 1 at the start of the variable display is "1". The number of reserved balls in special chart at the start of the variable display is also called the "reserved number at the start of the variable". In this case, the reserved number at the time of the start ball hit and the reserved number at the start of the variable are both "1", and the reserved number is the same at the time of the start ball hit and the start of the variable.

On the other hand, for example, suppose that the first start ball is received in a non-time-saving state (low probability low base state), and the occurrence of the first start ball causes the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 to change from "1" to "2". In this case, the number of reserved balls at the time of the start ball is "2". The first special chart reservation corresponding to the first start ball is called the "target reservation". After that, if the target reservation is consumed without the first start ball being received before the target reservation is consumed, the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 will decrease in the order of "2", "1", and "0". When the number of reserved balls in the special chart 1 changes from "1" to "0", that is, the number of reserved balls at the start of the fluctuation based on the target reservation is "1" (the number of reserved balls becomes "0" when the fluctuation display starts). In addition, if the first start ball is received before the target reservation is consumed, the number of reserved balls at the start of the fluctuation based on the target reservation can fluctuate between "1" and "4".

In this way, the number of reserved balls at the time of the start ball entry and the start of the fluctuation may be the same or different. In this regard, according to the first fluctuation pattern table, for fluctuation patterns P1 to P3 (jackpot fluctuation patterns) and fluctuation patterns P4 and P5 (miss fluctuation patterns), the fluctuation pattern judgment value is set to be the same regardless of the number of balls reserved on the special chart when the fluctuation display begins (see Figure 9A), so there is no inconsistency between the presentation based on the result of the advance judgment regarding the first start ball entry (special chart 1 start ball entry command) and the fluctuation pattern determined at the start of the fluctuation.

The above is an explanation of the first fluctuation pattern table (fluctuation pattern table for non-time-saving state), but the same can be said about the second fluctuation pattern table (fluctuation pattern table for time-saving state). That is, as shown in FIG. 9B, the second fluctuation pattern table targets fluctuation patterns P11 to P18. In the second fluctuation pattern table, a random number value (random number range) for determining the fluctuation pattern is set for each of the fluctuation patterns P11 to P18 as a fluctuation pattern determination value. Of the fluctuation patterns P11 to P18, fluctuation patterns P11 to P13 are jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the result of the hit/miss determination is a jackpot, and fluctuation patterns P14 to P18 are miss fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the result of the hit/miss determination is a miss.

Fluctuation patterns P11 and P14 are fluctuation patterns with a fluctuation time of 75,000 ms, fluctuation patterns P12 and P15 are fluctuation patterns with a fluctuation time of 45,000 ms, fluctuation patterns P13 and P16 are fluctuation patterns with a fluctuation time of 30,000 ms, fluctuation pattern P17 is a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 12,000 ms, and fluctuation pattern P18 is a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 1,000 ms. The contents of each of these fluctuation patterns (the contents of the fluctuation performance executed based on each fluctuation pattern) are as shown in Figure 9B, and will be described in detail later.

The fluctuation pattern judgment value corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns P11 to P13 (jackpot fluctuation patterns) is the same regardless of the number of special reserved balls (1 to 4) when the fluctuation display starts. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern judgment value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern P11 is "0 to 69" regardless of the number of special reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts, the fluctuation pattern judgment value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern P12 is "70 to 139" regardless of the number of special reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts, and the fluctuation pattern judgment value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern P13 is "140 to 198" regardless of the number of special reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts.

The fluctuation pattern judgment value corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns P14 to P16 (missing fluctuation patterns) may be the same regardless of the number of special reserved balls (1 to 4) when the fluctuation display starts, or it may be different depending on the number of special reserved balls (1 to 4) when the fluctuation display starts.

Specifically, the fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern P14 is set to "0 to 1" regardless of the number of balls reserved for the special chart when the fluctuation display starts. In other words, the fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern P14 is set to the same regardless of the number of balls reserved for the special chart when the fluctuation display starts.

The fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern P15 is "2 to 5" when the number of reserved balls on the special chart when the fluctuation display starts is "1", and is "2 to 3" when the number of reserved balls on the special chart when the fluctuation display starts is "2, 3, or 4". In other words, the fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern P15 differs depending on the number of reserved balls on the special chart when the fluctuation display starts.

The fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern P16 is "6 to 11" when the number of reserved balls on the special chart when the fluctuation display starts is "1", and is "4 to 9" when the number of reserved balls on the special chart when the fluctuation display starts is "2, 3, or 4". In other words, the fluctuation pattern determination value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern P16 differs depending on the number of reserved balls on the special chart when the fluctuation display starts.

The fluctuation pattern judgment value corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns P17 and P18 (missing fluctuation pattern) may or may not be set depending on the number of special reserved balls (1 to 4) when the fluctuation display starts.

Specifically, the fluctuation pattern judgment value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern P17 is set to "12 to 198" when the number of special reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "1", and is not set when the number of special reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "2 to 4". In other words, the fluctuation pattern judgment value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern P17 is set when the number of special reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "1", and is not set when the number of special reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "2 to 4". For this reason, for example, in the time-saving state, if the result of the second special pattern hit/miss judgment is a miss and the number of special reserved balls for the second special pattern when the fluctuation display of the second special pattern starts is "2", "3", or "4", the fluctuation pattern P17 does not appear.

The fluctuation pattern judgment value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern P18 is set to "10 to 198" when the number of special reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "2 to 4", and is not set when the number of special reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "1". In other words, the fluctuation pattern judgment value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern P18 is set when the number of special reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "2 to 4", and is not set when the number of special reserved balls when the fluctuation display starts is "1". For this reason, for example, in the time-saving state, if the result of the second special pattern hit/miss judgment is a miss and the number of special reserved balls for the second special pattern when the fluctuation display of the second special pattern starts is "1", the fluctuation pattern P18 does not appear.

According to such a second variation pattern table, for example, when a game ball enters the second start hole 21 (also called the "second start ball entry") in a time-saving state (low probability high base state or high probability high base state), even if the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 when the preliminary determination of the variation pattern related to the second start ball entry (S317) is performed and the number of reserved balls in the special chart 2 when the special chart 2 variation pattern selection process (S1203) related to the second start ball entry is performed (when the variation display starts) are different, there will be no inconsistency between the presentation based on the result of the preliminary determination of the second start ball entry (special chart 2 start ball entry command) and the variation pattern determined at the start of the variation for variation patterns P11 to P13 (jackpot variation pattern) and variation pattern P14 (miss variation pattern). The reason for this is the same as in the case of the first variation pattern table described above, so an explanation will be omitted.

Here, among the fluctuation pattern judgment values (judgment information) set for each of the multiple fluctuation patterns in the fluctuation pattern table, the judgment values (judgment values that are the same regardless of the number of balls reserved in the special chart when the fluctuation display starts) set for each of the fluctuation patterns P1 to P3 (jackpot fluctuation patterns), fluctuation patterns P4, P5 (miss fluctuation patterns), fluctuation patterns P11 to P13 (jackpot fluctuation patterns), and fluctuation pattern P14 are also called "specific judgment information", and any or all of the fluctuation patterns P1 to P3 (jackpot fluctuation patterns) and fluctuation patterns P4, P5 (miss fluctuation patterns) that correspond to the specific judgment information are also called "specific fluctuation patterns", and any or all of the other fluctuation patterns P6 to P10 and P15 to P18 (fluctuation patterns different from the specific fluctuation patterns) are also called "non-specific fluctuation patterns".

When making a pre-determination of the fluctuation pattern based on the first fluctuation pattern table, it is possible to determine which of fluctuation patterns P1 to P10 (multiple fluctuation patterns) the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display based on the reserved special chart to be determined will be, or to determine whether or not it will be fluctuation pattern P1, P2, P3, P4 or P5 (specific fluctuation pattern) among fluctuation patterns P1 to P10 (multiple fluctuation patterns), and it is possible to execute a performance (pre-determination) based on the results of these determinations.

In the advance judgment of the fluctuation pattern based on the first fluctuation pattern table, the judgment of whether the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display based on the reserved special chart to be judged becomes a specific fluctuation pattern can be made by judging whether the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern determination information) obtained based on the starting ball matches a judgment value (judgment information) in the first fluctuation pattern table that is considered to be the same regardless of the number of reserved special chart balls ("0 to 74", "75 to 149", or "150 to 198" if the advance judgment of whether it is a hit or not is a jackpot, and "0 to 3" or "4 to 7" if it is a miss).

In addition, when a pre-determination of the fluctuation pattern is made based on the second fluctuation pattern table, it is possible to determine which of fluctuation patterns P11 to P18 (multiple fluctuation patterns) the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display based on the reserved special chart to be determined will be, or to determine whether or not it will be fluctuation pattern P11, P12, P13, or P14 (specific fluctuation pattern) among fluctuation patterns P11 to P18 (multiple fluctuation patterns), and it is possible to execute a performance (pre-determination) based on the results of these determinations.

In the advance judgment of the fluctuation pattern based on the second fluctuation pattern table, the judgment of whether the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display based on the reserved special chart to be judged becomes a specific fluctuation pattern can be made by judging whether the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation pattern determination information) obtained based on the starting ball matches a judgment value (judgment information) in the second fluctuation pattern table that is considered to be the same regardless of the number of reserved special chart balls ("0 to 69", "70 to 139", or "140 to 198" if the advance judgment of whether it is a hit or not is a jackpot, and "0 to 1" if it is a miss).

[General action processing]
After the start ball entry process (S205), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the normal symbol operation process (S206) shown in FIG. 14. In the normal symbol operation process (S206), the process related to the normal symbol display 42 and the variable winning device 22 is divided into four stages, and each stage is assigned a normal symbol operation status "1" to "4". If the normal symbol operation status is "1" (YES in S401), a normal symbol waiting process (S402) is performed; if it is "2" (NO in S401, YES in S403), a normal symbol changing process (S404) is performed; if it is "3" (NO in both S401 and S403, YES in S405), a normal symbol determination process (S406) is performed; if it is "4" (NO in S401, S403, and S405), a normal electric device process (S407) is performed. The default operating status is "1".

[Normal symbol standby processing]
As shown in FIG. 15, in the normal symbol waiting process (S402), first, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (S501), and if it is "0" (YES in S501), this process is terminated without performing the process after S502. On the other hand, if it is not "0" (NO in S501), the normal symbol hit/miss judgment process described later is performed (S502), and then the normal symbol change pattern selection process is performed (S503). In the normal symbol change pattern selection process, by referring to the normal symbol change pattern selection table shown in FIG. 8 (D), if the game state is in the time-saving state, the normal symbol change pattern with a change time of 1 second is selected. On the other hand, if the game state is not in the time-saving state, the normal symbol change pattern with a change time of 30 seconds is selected.

Next, the normal pattern random number shift process (S504) described below is performed, followed by the normal pattern change start process (S505), which ends this process. In the normal pattern change start process (S505), the display of the normal pattern changes is started based on the normal pattern change pattern selected in S503, and the normal operation status is set to "2". In addition, in the normal pattern change start process, a normal pattern change start command is set to notify the sub-control board 90 that the normal pattern change has started.

[Normal pattern correctness determination process]
As shown in FIG. 16, in the normal symbol hit/miss judgment process (S502), first, the value (label-TRND-H) of the normal symbol hit/miss judgment random number counter stored in the lowest area of the normal symbol reservation memory section (i.e., the RAM area corresponding to the first normal symbol reservation) (oldest memory) is read (S601). Next, it is judged whether the time-saving flag is ON (whether the game state is in the time-saving state or not) (S602). If it is judged that the time-saving flag is ON, that is, the time-saving state is being held (YES in S602), a high probability normal symbol hit/miss judgment is made based on the time-saving state table (hit judgment value is "0" to "239") among the normal symbol hit judgment tables shown in FIG. 8 (C) (S604), and the process proceeds to S605. That is, it is judged whether the value (label-TRND-H) of the normal symbol hit/miss judgment random number counter read out matches any of the hit judgment values.

In contrast, if it is determined in S602 that the time-saving flag is not ON, i.e., that the game is not in the time-saving state (NO in S602), a low-probability normal symbol hit determination is made based on the table for the non-time-saving state (hit determination values are "0" and "1") in the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 8 (C) (S603), and the process proceeds to S605.

In S605, it is determined whether the result of the normal symbol hit/miss determination (S603, S604) is a hit (normal symbol hit) or not (S605), and if it is determined that it is not a hit (miss) (NO in S605), the missing normal symbol (normal symbol miss symbol) to be displayed as a stop symbol is determined (S606), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is a hit (normal symbol hit) (YES in S605), the winning normal symbol (normal symbol hit symbol) to be displayed as a stop symbol is determined (S607), the normal symbol hit flag is set to ON (S608), and the process ends.

[Normal pattern random number shift processing]
As shown in FIG. 17, in the normal pattern random number shift process (S504), first, the number of normal pattern reserved balls is subtracted by 1 (S701). Next, the storage location of each normal pattern reserved in the normal pattern reserved memory unit is shifted by one from the current position to the side to be read (S702). Then, the address space which is the storage location of the top reserved memory in the normal pattern reserved memory unit is made empty ("0"), that is, the RAM area corresponding to the fourth normal pattern reserved is cleared to 0 (S703), and the process is completed. In this way, the normal pattern reserved is consumed in the reserved order.

[Normal pattern change processing]
As shown in FIG. 18, in the normal pattern change process (S404), first, it is determined whether the normal pattern change time has elapsed (S801), and if it has not elapsed (NO in S801), this process is terminated without performing the process from S802 onwards. On the other hand, if the normal pattern change time has elapsed (YES in S801), a normal pattern change stop command is set (S802) and the normal pattern operation status is set to "3" (S803). Then, other processes such as stopping the display of the normal pattern (ending the display of the normal pattern change) with the display result (won normal pattern or lost normal pattern) according to the result of the random number for determining whether the normal pattern is a hit or miss are performed (S804), and this process is terminated.

[Normal design confirmation process]
As shown in FIG. 19, in the normal pattern determination process (S406), first, it is determined whether the normal pattern winning flag is ON (S901). If the normal pattern winning flag is not ON (NO in S901), the normal pattern operation status is set to "1" (S905), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the normal pattern winning flag is ON (YES in S901), it is determined whether the time-saving flag is ON, that is, whether the time-saving state is in progress (S902). Then, if the time-saving state is in progress (YES in S902), the opening pattern during the time-saving state is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting hole 21) (S903). As described above, the opening pattern during the time-saving state is an opening pattern that repeats 2.0-second opening three times. Corresponding to this, in S903, the opening pattern during the time-saving state of the second starting hole 21 is set, and the second starting hole opening counter that counts the number of times the second starting hole 21 is opened is set to "3".

On the other hand, if the game is not in the time-saving state (NO in S902), the opening pattern during the non-time-saving state is set as the opening pattern of the variable winning device 22 (second starting hole 21) (S906). As described above, the opening pattern during the non-time-saving state is an opening pattern in which a 0.2-second opening is performed once. In response to this, in S906, the opening pattern during the non-time-saving state of the second starting hole 21 is set, and the second starting hole opening counter, which counts the number of times the second starting hole 21 has been opened, is set to "1". Then, following the setting of the opening pattern (S903, S906), the normal operation status is set to "4" (S904), and this process is terminated.

[Normal electric accessory processing]
As shown in Fig. 20, in the normal electric role processing (S407), first, it is determined whether the normal winning end flag is ON (S1001). The normal winning end flag is a flag that indicates that the opening of the second starting hole 21 has ended in the auxiliary game that was executed as a winning.

If the normal hit end flag is not ON (NO in S1001), it is determined whether the second start port 21 is being opened (S1002). If it is not being opened (NO in S1002), it is determined whether the time (timing) to open the second start port 21 has arrived (S1003). If not (NO in S1003), this process ends. If it has arrived (YES in S1003), the second start port 21 is opened (S1004) and this process ends. On the other hand, if the second start port 21 is open (YES in S1002), it is determined whether the time has come to close the second start port 21 (i.e., whether a predetermined opening time has elapsed since the second start port 21 was opened) (S1005). If not (NO in S1005), this process is terminated, and if it has come (YES in S1005), the second start port 21 is closed (S1006).

Following the closing process of the second start hole 21 (S1006), the value of the second start hole opening counter is decremented by one (S1007), and it is determined whether the value of the second start hole opening counter is "0" or not (S1008). If it is not "0" (NO in S1008), this process is terminated to open the second start hole 21 again. On the other hand, if the value of the second start hole opening counter is "0" (YES in S1008), a normal win end process is performed to end the auxiliary game (S1009), and the normal win end flag is set (S1010), and this process is terminated. Note that the second start hole opening counter becomes "0" when the second start hole 21 is opened (the movable member 23 is opened) three times during the time-saving state, and becomes "0" when the second start hole 21 is opened once during the non-time-saving state.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1001 that the normal symbol win end flag is ON (YES in S1001), the opening operation of the second starting port 21 has ended for the number of times set in S903 or S906, so the normal symbol win end flag is turned OFF (S1011), the normal symbol win flag is turned OFF (S1012), the normal symbol operation status is set to "1" (S1013), and this process ends. As a result, in the next interrupt process, the normal symbol wait process (S402) will be executed again as the normal symbol operation process (S206).

[Special diagram operation processing]
As shown in Fig. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs special symbol operation processing (S207) following normal symbol operation processing (S206). As shown in Fig. 21, in the special symbol operation processing (S207), the processing related to the special symbol display device 41 and the big prize device 31 is divided into four stages, and each stage is assigned one of the special symbol operation statuses "1" to "4".

If the "special symbol operation status" is "1" (YES in S1101), special symbol waiting processing (S1102) is performed; if it is "2" (NO in S1101, YES in S1103), special symbol changing processing (S1104) is performed; if it is "3" (NO in both S1101 and S1103, YES in S1105), special symbol determination processing (S1106) is performed; and if it is "4" (NO in S1101, S1103, and S1105), special electric device processing (S1107) is performed as a jackpot game. The initial setting for the special symbol operation status is "1."

[Special symbol standby process]
As shown in Fig. 22, in the special symbol waiting process (S1102), first, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls in the second starting hole 21 (i.e., the number of reserved balls in special symbol 2) is "0" (S1201). If the number of reserved balls in special symbol 2 is "0" (YES in S1201), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value (obtained random number value, obtained information) obtained due to the ball entering the second starting hole 21, it is determined whether the number of reserved balls in the first starting hole 20 (i.e., the number of reserved balls in special symbol 1) is "0" (S1206). If the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 is also "0" (YES in S1206), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value obtained due to a ball entering the first starting hole 20, it is determined whether or not the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is being processed to be a standby screen (a demo screen for waiting customers is being executed) (S1211), and if so (YES in S1211), this process ends without processing S1212, and if not (NO in S1211), a standby screen setting process is executed to display the standby screen (S1212). The standby screen includes the aforementioned performance setting screen (not shown).

In the standby screen setting process (S1212), when the number of reserved balls for special charts (number of reserved balls for special chart 1 and number of reserved balls for special chart 2) is "0" and variable play is not being performed for a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed, a standby screen is displayed on the display screen 7a. The state in which the standby screen is displayed, that is, the state in which the pachinko game machine 1 occurs (transitions to) when the number of reserved balls for special charts is "0" and variable play is not being performed for a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds), is also called the "standby state" or "waiting for customers state".

If it is determined in S1201 that the number of reserved balls for Special Chart 2 is not "0" (NO in S1201), that is, if there is one or more memories of random number counter values (obtained random number values, obtained information) obtained due to a ball entering the second starting hole 21, the Special Chart 2 hit/miss determination process (S1202), Special Chart 2 change pattern selection process (S1203), Special Chart 2 random number shift process (S1204), and Special Chart 2 change start process (S1205) described below are performed in this order. Also, if the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 is "0" but the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 is not "0" (YES in S1201, NO in S1206), that is, if there is no memory of the random number counter value related to the second starting hole 21 but there is one or more memories of the random number counter value (obtained random number value, obtained information) obtained due to a ball entering the first starting hole 20, the special chart 1 hit/miss judgment process (S1207), special chart 1 change pattern selection process (S1208), special chart 1 random number shift process (S1209), and special chart 1 change start process (S1210) described below are performed in this order.

In this embodiment, the display of the first special pattern based on the reserved first special pattern is only performed when the reserved second special pattern is "0" (YES in S1201). In other words, the consumption of the reserved second special pattern (display of the second special pattern) is executed in priority to the consumption of the reserved first special pattern (display of the first special pattern). And in this embodiment, a win/loss judgment based on the reserved second special pattern is more likely to result in a jackpot that is more profitable for the player than a win/loss judgment based on the reserved first special pattern (see Figure 8 (B)).

[Special diagram 2 pass/fail judgment process]
As shown in FIG. 23, in the special pattern 2 hit/miss judgment process (S1202), first, the random number value (label-TRND-A) for the hit/miss judgment of the special pattern stored in the lowest area of the second special pattern reserved memory section of the RAM (i.e., the RAM area corresponding to the first one of the second special pattern reserved) (oldest memory) is read (S1301). Next, it is judged whether the probability variable flag is ON, that is, whether it is in a high probability state (S1302). Then, if it is not in a high probability state (NO in S1302), that is, in a normal state, a hit/miss judgment is made based on the hit judgment table for the normal state (the hit judgment value is "3" and "397") in the hit judgment table (see FIG. 8 (A)) (S1303). On the other hand, if it is in a high probability state (YES in S1302), a hit/miss judgment is made based on the hit judgment table for the high probability state in the hit judgment table (see FIG. 8 (A)) (S1304). In the jackpot determination table for high probability states, the jackpot determination values are "3,""53,""113,""173,""227,""281,""337,""397,""449," and "503."

If the result of the hit/miss determination (S1303, S1304) is a "jackpot" (YES in S1305), the random number value for determining the type of jackpot (label-TRND-AS) acquired (stored) along with the random number value for determining the special pattern hit/miss read in S1301 is read out, the type of jackpot is determined based on the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 8(B) (S1307), the jackpot pattern is determined based on the value of the random number for determining the type of jackpot (S1308), the jackpot flag is turned ON (S1309), and this process ends. On the other hand, if the result of the hit/miss determination (S1303, S1304) is not a "jackpot" (NO in S1305), the miss pattern is determined (S1306), and this process ends.

When determining the type of jackpot, in the case of a win/loss judgment for the first special symbol (also called "special symbol 1 win/loss judgment"), the type of jackpot is determined using the jackpot type judgment table for the first special symbol, and in the case of a win/loss judgment for the second special symbol (also called "special symbol 2 win/loss judgment"), the type of jackpot is determined using the jackpot type judgment table for the second special symbol. Note that the special symbol win/loss judgment and jackpot type judgment may each be called "judgments," or the jackpot judgment may be performed and the determination of which jackpot symbol will result may also be called "judgments." These results may also be called "judgment results."

The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that executes the win/loss judgment for the second special symbol (S1303, S1304) functions as a "special symbol 2 win/loss judgment execution means." The win/loss judgment for the second special symbol (S1303, S1304) corresponds to a process that determines whether or not to control the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to a jackpot gaming state (special gaming state). Therefore, the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that executes the win/loss judgment for the second special symbol (S1303, S1304) also functions as a "special gaming determination means."

[Special Chart 2 Variation Pattern Selection Processing]
As shown in Fig. 22, in the special symbol waiting process (S1102), the special symbol 2 hit/miss determination process (S1202) is followed by the special symbol 2 variation pattern selection process (S1203). As shown in Fig. 24 and Fig. 25, in the special symbol 2 variation pattern selection process (S1203), first, it is determined whether the game state is in a time-saving state (whether the time-saving flag is ON or not) (S1401). As a result, if it is determined that the time-saving state is not in (NO in S1401), that is, if it is in a non-time-saving state, it is then determined whether the big win flag is ON or not (S1402).

When it is determined in S1402 that the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S1402), the random number value for determining whether or not the special symbol has been selected is read in S1301, along with the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern (label-TRND-T1) acquired (stored) in S308, and a fluctuation pattern is selected based on the table for jackpots in non-time-saving state (the portion of the fluctuation pattern table for non-time-saving state shown in FIG. 9A that corresponds to a jackpot) (S1403). In S1403, one of the fluctuation patterns P1 to P3 is selected. In other words, when a jackpot fluctuation is executed in a non-time-saving state, the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot fluctuation is determined to be one of P1 to P3. Once the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1402 that the jackpot flag is not ON (NO in S1402), then it is determined whether the reserved number of the second special symbol is "1" or "2" (S1405). The reserved number in this process refers to the number of memories including the information that determines the fluctuation pattern by this process, so the number of reserved memories is set to any value between "1" and "4".

If it is determined in S1405 that the reserved number is "1" or "2" (YES in S1405), the random number value for determining the variation pattern (label-TRND-T1) acquired (stored) together with the random number value for determining whether or not the special pattern was hit and read in S1301 described above is read, and a variation pattern is selected based on the first reserved number miss table (the portion of the variation pattern table for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. 9A that corresponds to a miss and reserved ball number "1, 2") (S1406). In S1406, one of the variation patterns P4 to P8 is selected. In other words, when a miss variation is executed in the non-time-saving state and the reserved number at the start of the variation is "1" or "2", the variation pattern of the miss variation is determined to be one of P4 to P8.

If it is determined in S1405 that the reserved number is not "1" or "2" (NO in S1405), it is determined whether the reserved number of the second special symbol is "3" or not (S1407). Then, if it is determined that the reserved number is "3" (YES in S1407), the random number value for determining the variation pattern (label-TRND-T1) acquired (stored) together with the random number value for determining whether the special symbol is a hit or miss read in the above-mentioned S1301 is read, and a variation pattern is selected based on the table for the second reserved number miss (the part of the variation pattern table for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. 9A that corresponds to a miss and the reserved ball number "3") (S1408). In S1408, one of the variation patterns P4 to P7, P9 is selected. In other words, when a miss variation is executed in the non-time-saving state and the reserved number at the start of the variation is "3", the variation pattern of the miss variation is determined to be one of P4 to P7, P9.

If it is determined in S1407 that the reserved number is not "3" (NO in S1407), that is, if the reserved number is "4", the random number value for determining the variation pattern (label-TRND-T1) acquired (stored) together with the random number value for determining whether the special pattern was a hit or miss read in the above-mentioned S1301 is read, and a variation pattern is selected based on the third reserved number miss table (the portion of the variation pattern table for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. 9A that corresponds to a miss and the reserved number of balls "4") (S1409). In S1409, one of the variation patterns P4 to P7, P10 is selected. In other words, when a miss variation is executed in the non-time-saving state and the reserved number at the start of the variation is "4", the variation pattern of the miss variation is determined to be one of P4 to P7, P10.

Here, the variation pattern with the shortest variation time selectable in the first reserved number miss table (12000 ms) has a longer variation time than that of the second reserved number miss table (4000 ms) and the third reserved number miss table (2000 ms). In addition, the first reserved number miss table is set so that the variation time is relatively longer than that of the second reserved number miss table and the third reserved number miss table. For this reason, when a miss variation is executed in a non-time-saving state, when the reserved number at the start of the variation is less than "3", the variation time is relatively longer, while when the reserved number is "3" or more, the variation time is relatively shorter, and when the reserved number is "4", it is even shorter. This makes it possible to efficiently consume the miss variation while making it difficult for the variation display (variation play) to be interrupted, and as a result, it is possible to improve the efficiency of the variation display.

Next, the process for selecting (determining) the special symbol 2 variation pattern in the time-saving state will be described. That is, when it is determined in S1401 that the time-saving state is in effect (YES in S1401), it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON or not (S1410). As a result, when it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S1410), the random number value for determining the variation pattern (label-TRND-T1) acquired (stored) together with the random number value for determining whether or not the special symbol has been hit that was read in the above-mentioned S1301 is read, and a variation pattern is selected based on the time-saving state jackpot table (the portion of the variation pattern table for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 9B that corresponds to the jackpot) (S1411). In S1411, one of the variation patterns P11 to P13 is selected. In other words, when a jackpot variation is executed in the time-saving state, the variation pattern of the jackpot variation is determined to be one of P11 to P13.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S1410 that the jackpot flag is not ON (NO in S1410), it is determined whether the reserved number is "1" or not (S1412). The reserved number here is the same as described above, and the reserved number is set to any value from "1" to "4". If it is determined in S1412 that the reserved number is "1" (YES in S1412), the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern (label-TRND-T1) acquired (stored) together with the random number value for determining whether the special pattern is a hit or miss read in S1301 described above is read, and a fluctuation pattern is selected based on the fourth reserved number miss table (the part of the fluctuation pattern table for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 9B that corresponds to a miss and the reserved ball number "1") (S1413). In S1413, one of the fluctuation patterns P14 to P17 is selected. In other words, when a miss fluctuation is executed in the time-saving state and the reserved number at the start of the fluctuation is "1", the fluctuation pattern of the miss fluctuation is determined to be one of P14 to P17.

If it is determined in S1412 that the reserved number is not "1" (NO in S1412), that is, if the reserved number is any of "2" to "4", the random number value for determining the variation pattern (label-TRND-T1) acquired (stored) together with the random number value for determining whether or not the special symbol is a hit read in the above-mentioned S1301 is read, and a variation pattern is selected based on the fifth table for missed reserved numbers (the portion of the table for variation patterns for the time-saving state shown in FIG. 9B that corresponds to misses and the reserved number of balls "2 to 4") (S1414). In S1414, one of the variation patterns P14 to P16, P18 is selected. In other words, if a miss variation is executed in the time-saving state and the reserved number at the start of the variation is any of "2" to "4", the variation pattern of the miss variation is determined to be one of P14 to P16, P18.

The variation pattern selected in the event of a miss in the time-saving state is more likely to be a variation pattern with a shorter variation time (1000 ms) than the variation pattern selected in the event of a miss in the non-time-saving state. This is to speed up the consumption of special reserved charts (miss variations) in the time-saving state. This makes it possible to quickly progress with the variation game during the time-saving state and efficiently aim for a jackpot.

After the variation pattern is selected as described above, other processing shown in FIG. 24 is performed (S1404), and this processing ends. In the other processing (S1404), a variation pattern designation command corresponding to the selected variation pattern is set in the output buffer of the RAM, and the set variation pattern designation command is included in a variation start command, which will be described later, and is sent to the sub-control unit 90 by the output processing (S201).

The types and number of special symbol variation patterns (also called "special symbol variation patterns") are not limited to those shown in this embodiment (see Figures 9A and 9B), and the types and number are arbitrary, such as increasing or decreasing the variation patterns compared to this embodiment.

[Special Figure 2 Random Number Shift Processing]
As shown in Fig. 26, in the special chart 2 random number shift process (S1204), first, the number of reserved balls for special chart 2 is subtracted by 1 (S1501). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the second special chart reserved memory unit is shifted to the lower side by one (for example, when the second special chart reserved memory unit is made up of an address space corresponding to addresses "0000" to "0003", the address "0000" side) (S1502). Then, "0" is set in the top address space of the second special chart reserved memory unit (S1503), and this process is completed.

After the special symbol 2 random number shift process (S1204) is executed, the special symbol 2 variation start process (S1205) is executed as shown in FIG. 22. In the special symbol 2 variation start process (S1205), the special symbol operation status is set to "2" and a variation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM to start the variation display of the second special symbol.

[Special diagram 1 pass/fail judgment process]
As shown in FIG. 27, in the special symbol 1 hit/miss judgment process (S1207), the process (S1601 to S1609) is performed in the same flow as the special symbol 2 hit/miss judgment process (S1202) shown in FIG. 23. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted. However, since this process is a process related to the special symbol 1, in S1601, the random number value for special symbol hit/miss judgment stored in the lowest area of the first special symbol reservation memory section of the RAM (i.e., the RAM area corresponding to the first one of the first special symbol reservations) is read and processed. The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that executes the hit/miss judgment related to the first special symbol (S1603, S1604) functions as a "special symbol 1 hit/miss judgment execution means". In addition, the hit/miss judgment related to the first special symbol (S1603, S1604) corresponds to a process that determines whether or not to control the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 to a big win game state (special game state). Therefore, the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) which executes the win/loss determination for the first special symbol (S1603, S1604) also functions as a "special game determination means."

[Special Chart 1 Variation Pattern Selection Processing]
As shown in Figures 28 and 29, in the special chart 1 variation pattern selection process (S1208), processing (S1701 to S1714) is performed in the same manner as the special chart 2 variation pattern selection process (S1203) shown in Figures 24 and 25. Therefore, detailed description of this process is omitted.

Here, in the variation pattern selection process (S1203, S1208), the variation pattern of the special symbol variation display is determined based on the result of the win/lose determination (the result of the determination by the special game determination means), the number of reserved balls at the start of the variation (the number of reserved balls stored when the variation display starts), the variation pattern determination random number value (variation pattern determination information obtained by the acquisition means) obtained based on the starting ball, and the variation pattern determination value (predetermined determination information) of the variation pattern table. The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that executes the variation pattern selection process (S1203, S1208) functions as the "variation pattern determination means".

When determining the jackpot fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern table for the non-time-saving state, if the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern obtained based on the starting ball is "0 to 74", the fluctuation pattern is determined to be P1 regardless of the number of balls reserved for the special chart, if the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is "75 to 149", the fluctuation pattern is determined to be P2 regardless of the number of balls reserved for the special chart, and if the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is "150 to 198", the fluctuation pattern is determined to be P3 regardless of the number of balls reserved for the special chart (see Figure 9A). Therefore, in the non-time-saving state, it is possible to make a jackpot fluctuation due to any of the fluctuation patterns P1 to P3 appear regardless of the number of balls reserved at the start of the fluctuation. In other words, it is possible to fix (stabilize) the appearance mode of the fluctuation patterns P1 to P3.

In addition, when selecting (determining) a miss pattern based on the non-time-saving state, if the random number value for determining the pattern obtained based on the starting ball is "0-3", the pattern is determined to be P4 regardless of the number of balls reserved for the special chart, if the random number value for determining the pattern is "4-7", the pattern is determined to be P5 regardless of the number of balls reserved for the special chart, and if the random number value for determining the pattern is a value other than "0-7" ("8-198"), the pattern is determined to be one of P6-P10 depending on the number of balls reserved for the special chart (see FIG. 9A). Therefore, in the non-time-saving state, it is possible to make a miss pattern due to the pattern P4 or P5 appear regardless of the number of balls reserved at the start of the change, while it is possible to make a miss pattern due to one of the pattern P6-P10 appear depending on the number of balls reserved at the start of the change. In other words, it is possible to fix (stabilize) the appearance mode for the pattern P4 and P5, and it is possible to adjust the appearance mode for the pattern P6-P10 depending on the number of balls reserved at the start of the change.

In addition, when determining the jackpot fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern table for the time-saving state, if the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern obtained based on the starting ball is "0 to 69", the fluctuation pattern is determined to be P11 regardless of the number of balls reserved for the special chart, if the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is "70 to 139", the fluctuation pattern is determined to be P12 regardless of the number of balls reserved for the special chart, and if the random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern is "140 to 198", the fluctuation pattern is determined to be P13 regardless of the number of balls reserved for the special chart (see Figure 9B). Therefore, in the time-saving state, it is possible to make a jackpot fluctuation due to any of the fluctuation patterns P11 to P13 appear regardless of the number of balls reserved at the start of the fluctuation. In other words, it is possible to fix (stabilize) the appearance mode of the fluctuation patterns P11 to P13.

In addition, when selecting (determining) a miss pattern based on the time-saving state, if the random number value for determining the pattern obtained based on the starting ball is "0 to 1", the pattern is determined to be P14 regardless of the number of balls reserved for the special chart, and if the random number value for determining the pattern is a value other than "0 to 1" ("2 to 198"), the pattern is determined to be one of P15 to P18 depending on the number of balls reserved for the special chart (see FIG. 9B). Therefore, in the time-saving state, it is possible to make a miss pattern due to the pattern P14 appear regardless of the number of balls reserved at the start of the change, while it is possible to make a miss pattern due to one of the patterns P15 to P18 appear depending on the number of balls reserved at the start of the change. In other words, it is possible to fix (stabilize) the appearance mode of the pattern P14, and it is possible to adjust the appearance mode of the pattern P15 to P18 depending on the number of balls reserved at the start of the change.

[Special Figure 1: Random number shift processing]
As shown in Fig. 30, in the special chart 1 random number shift process (S1209), first, the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 is subtracted by 1 (S1801). Next, the storage location of various counter values in the first special chart reserved memory unit is shifted to the lower side by one (S2002). Then, "0" is set in the top address space of the first special chart reserved memory unit (S1803), and this process is completed.

After the special symbol 1 random number shift process (S1209) is executed, the special symbol 1 variation start process (S1210) is executed as shown in FIG. 22. In the special symbol 1 variation start process (S1210), the special symbol operation status is set to "2" and a variation start command is set in the output buffer of the RAM to start the variation display of the first special symbol.

[Special pattern change processing]
As shown in Fig. 31, in the special symbol variation process (S1104), first, it is determined whether the variation time of the special symbol, that is, the variation time determined according to the variation pattern selected in the above-mentioned S1203 or S1208 (see Fig. 9A and Fig. 9B), has elapsed (S1901). If it is determined that the variation time has not elapsed (NO in S1901), this process is terminated without performing the processes from S1902 onwards. This allows the variation display of the special symbol to continue.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in S1901), a fluctuation stop command is set (S1902). Then, it is determined whether the high probability flag is ON (S1903), and if it is ON (YES in S1903), the high probability counter is decremented by one (S1904), and it is determined whether the value of the high probability counter is "0" (S1905). If it is determined that the high probability counter is "0" (YES in S1905), the high probability flag is turned OFF and the process moves to S1907. The high probability state (high probability state) ends with the process of S1906. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1903 that the high probability flag is not ON (NO in S1903), or if it is determined in S1905 that the high probability counter is not "0" (NO in S1905), the process moves to S1907.

In S1907, it is determined whether the time-saving flag is ON (S1907). If it is determined that the time-saving flag is ON (YES in S1907), the value of the time-saving counter that counts the number of times the special pattern is displayed during the time-saving state is decremented by one (S1908), and it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (S1909). If the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (YES in S1909), the time-saving flag is turned OFF (S1910), and the process proceeds to S1911. The time-saving state (and the high base state) ends as a result of the process of S1910. On the other hand, if it is determined in S1907 that the time-saving flag is not ON (NO in S1907), or if it is determined in S1909 that the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (NO in S1909), the process proceeds to S1911.

In S1911, the special symbol operation status is set to "3" (S1911). Then, other processing such as stopping the special symbol with a display result according to the results of the special symbol hit/miss judgment random number and the jackpot type determination random number is performed (ending the variable display of the special symbol) (S1912), and this processing ends. When stopping (ending) the variable display of the special symbol, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the stopped display time (stopped display period) of the special symbol (stopped symbol). Then, when the set stopped display time (stopped display period) has elapsed, the special symbol determination processing (S1106) is performed.

The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) executes the process of turning off the special probability flag when the special probability counter value becomes "0" and turning off the time-saving flag when the time-saving counter value becomes "0" (S1906, S1910), and functions as a "game state control means."

[Special design confirmation process]
As shown in FIG. 32, in the special symbol determination process (S1106), first, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON (S2001). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S2001), it is then determined whether the determined jackpot (the current jackpot) is a 10R jackpot (S2002). If it is determined to be a 10R jackpot (YES in S2002), the round counter that counts the number of rounds executed during the jackpot game is set to "10" (S2003), and the process proceeds to S2009. On the other hand, if it is determined in S2002 that the jackpot is not a 10R jackpot (NO in S2002), the determined jackpot (the current jackpot) is a 5R jackpot, so the round counter is set to "5" (S2004), and the process proceeds to S2009.

In S2009, a large prize opening pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot (jackpot type) that has been determined is set (S2009), and the process proceeds to S2010. As described above, the opening pattern of the large prize opening is determined according to the type of jackpot (see FIG. 6), so in S2009, a large prize opening opening pattern (long opening, short opening, number of openings, etc.) that corresponds to the currently determined jackpot is set. Then, the opening operation of the large prize opening 30 based on the large prize opening opening pattern set in S2009 is executed in the jackpot game (special game).

In S2010, a jackpot opening command is set to start jackpot play (S2010). In this embodiment, six types of opening commands are provided: a first opening command corresponding to the first jackpot in 10R, a second opening command corresponding to the second to fifth jackpots in 10R, a third opening command corresponding to the sixth jackpot in 5R, a fourth opening command corresponding to the seventh jackpot in 5R, a fifth opening command corresponding to the eighth jackpot in 10R, and a sixth opening command corresponding to the ninth jackpot in 10R.

In S2010, an opening command corresponding to the type of the currently confirmed jackpot (the jackpot to be started) is set. Then, the main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) transmits the set opening command to the sub-control unit 90 at a predetermined timing by the output process (S201). The sub-control unit 90, which receives the opening command, performs a process of executing a predetermined opening performance based on the opening command. In this embodiment, the opening command corresponding to the 10R second jackpot to the 5th jackpot is a common command (second opening command), and the opening performance is common (similar performance mode) for the 10R second jackpot to the 5th jackpot. This is to make it difficult for the player to determine the type of jackpot through the performance related to the jackpot (special jackpot) such as the opening performance, in consideration of the playability of the RUB, that is, the playability that draws the player's attention to how long the long opening round will continue.

Next, the opening period of the jackpot game is started (S2011), and the special chart operation status is set to "4" (S2012). Also, if it is determined in S2001 that the jackpot flag is not ON (NO in S2001), the special chart operation status is set to "1" (S2013), and the process ends.

The opening period is a period that is set before the first opening operation of the big prize opening in a big win game is started and after the stop display time (also called the "stop display period" or "fixed stop period") of the special pattern (performance pattern) that is stopped and displayed as a big win pattern has elapsed, and is a period during which the variable display of the special pattern (performance pattern) cannot be executed. The opening period is also called the "start period", and the performance (opening performance) executed in the opening period (start period) is also called the "start performance". In this embodiment, the opening period is included in the special game state. Note that the opening period may not be included in the special game state.

In this embodiment, the opening period (opening time) is determined by the type of jackpot that has been confirmed and the game state when the jackpot has been confirmed (when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed), and the opening period can be specified by the opening command described above. Therefore, the sub-control unit 90 that receives the opening command can perform an opening performance based on the jackpot type and opening period specified by the opening command. The length of the opening period (opening time) is generally set to a length that allows the player to recognize that a jackpot game is about to begin, and can be, for example, longer than the jackpot stop display time. In addition, the length of the opening period (opening time) may be varied depending on the game state when the jackpot occurs and the type of jackpot.

The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) which executes the above special symbol waiting process (S1102), special symbol variable process (S1104), and special symbol determination process (S1106) functions as a "variable game execution means." The variable game execution means is also called a "variable display execution means."

[Special electric device processing (jackpot play)]
As shown in FIG. 33, in the special electric role processing (S1107), first, it is determined whether or not the probability variable flag is ON (S2101), and if it is determined that the probability variable flag is ON (YES in S2101), the probability variable flag is turned OFF (S2102), and then it is determined whether or not the time-saving flag is ON (S2103). If it is determined in S2103 that the time-saving flag is ON (YES in S2103), the time-saving flag is turned OFF (S2104), and the process proceeds to S2105. Note that, if it is determined in S2101 that the probability variable flag is not ON (NO in S2101), the probability variable flag is OFF, so the process proceeds to S2103 without performing the process of S2102. Also, if it is determined in S2103 that the time-saving flag is not ON (NO in S2103), the time-saving flag is OFF, so the process proceeds to S2105 without performing the process of S2104. In other words, during the execution of the jackpot game, the game is controlled to a low probability state and a non-time-saving state. In this embodiment, since the game is always in a low base state during the non-time-saving state, the game is also controlled to a low base state during the execution of the jackpot game.

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot end flag is ON (S2105). The jackpot end flag is a flag that indicates that all operation processes of the big prize winning device 31 (opening process of the big prize winning port 30) in the big prize game have ended (the big prize game has ended). If the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2105), it is then determined whether it is time to start a round (S2106). This is determined based on the big prize winning port opening pattern set for each big prize type described above. For example, if it is before the start of the first round, it is determined whether the opening period has ended and it is the timing to execute the first opening process of the first round. Also, if the first round has already started, it is determined whether the previous round has ended and a predetermined interval time has passed (the interval period has ended).

When it is determined in S2106 that it is time to start a round (YES in S2106), the round start command for the corresponding round is set (S2107), and the large prize opening process is performed (S2108). This causes the large prize opening 30 to be opened and a specific round to start. In S2107, a round start command that can identify the round to start is set, for example, a "1R start command" for the start of the first round, and a "2R start command" for the start of the second round. The set round start command is sent to the sub-control unit 90 by the output process of S201. In addition, in the large prize opening process of S2108, the opening and closing member 32 is operated (opening operation) to open the large prize opening 30 based on the large prize opening opening pattern determined according to the type of jackpot to be executed, that is, the large prize opening opening pattern set in S2009 described above.

If it is determined in S2106 that it is not time to start a round (NO in S2106), the process proceeds to S2112. Here, examples of times when it is determined that it is not time to start a round include the opening period before the start of a round, during a round of play, and during the interval period after the end of a round of play (during the process of closing the large prize opening).

In S2112, it is determined whether or not the large prize opening operation is being performed, i.e., whether or not the large prize opening opened by the processing of S2108 is still open (during a round of play) (S2112). As a result, if it is determined that the large prize opening operation is not being performed (during a round of play) (NO in S2112), the process proceeds to S2116, and if it is determined that the large prize opening operation is being performed (during a round of play) (YES in S2112), it is determined whether or not the end condition for the ongoing round of play (round end condition) has been met (S2113).

The round end conditions in this embodiment are: (1) the opening time (e.g., 25 seconds) of the special prize opening set for the ongoing round game, i.e., the execution time of the round game, has elapsed; and (2) a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) have entered the special prize opening in the ongoing round game. If either one of the conditions is met first, the round end condition is met based on the condition that was met first. If it is determined in S2113 that the round end condition has not been met (NO in S2113), the process ends.

If it is determined in S2113 that the round end condition has been met (YES in S2113), a round end command for the corresponding round is set (S2114), and processing proceeds to S2115. In S2114, a round end command that can identify the round that is ending is set, for example, a "1R end command" for the end of the first round, or a "2R end command" for the end of the second round. The set round end command is sent to the sub-control unit 90 by the output processing of S201.

In S2115, the large prize opening closing process is performed, and the opening/closing member 32 of the large prize opening 30 is operated (closed) to close the large prize opening 30 (S2115). In addition, in the large prize opening closing process (S2115), the closing time for keeping the large prize opening 30 closed, i.e., the interval time, is set. As described above, in this embodiment, a first interval time (e.g., about 3 to 5 seconds) and a second interval time (e.g., about 0.5 to 1 second) are provided as interval times, so the first interval time or the second interval time is set depending on the type of large prize game being played and the number of rounds of the completed round game (S2115).

Next, in S2116, it is determined whether the interval time has elapsed (S2116), and if it is determined that the interval time has not elapsed (it is during the interval period) (NO in S2116), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the interval time has elapsed (YES in S2116), the round counter value is decremented by 1 (S2117), and it is determined whether the round counter value is "0" (S2118). Then, if it is determined that the round counter value is not "0" (NO in S2118), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the round counter value is "0" (YES in S2118), as a jackpot end process that ends the jackpot game, a jackpot ending command is set (S2119), a jackpot ending period is started (S2120), a jackpot end flag is turned ON (S2121), and this process ends. Note that the round counter value becomes "0" when all rounds of the jackpot game being executed are ended.

In S2119, an ending command corresponding to the game state at the time of the current jackpot occurrence, the type of the current jackpot, the game state after the jackpot play, etc. is selected from a number of predetermined ending commands, and the selected command is set. The type of ending command set in this way determines the ending period (ending time) to be executed (set). The ending period is a period that is set after all opening operations of the large prize winning port 30 in the jackpot play are completed and before the variable display of the special pattern (performance pattern) can be executed. The ending period is also called the "ending period". In the ending period (ending period), the large prize winning port 30 is in a closed state. The performance executed in the ending period (ending period) is also called the "ending performance" or "ending performance". In this embodiment, the ending period is included in the special game state. It should be noted that the ending period may not be included in the special game state.

The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) transmits the ending command set in S2119 to the sub-control unit 90 at a predetermined timing by output processing (S201). Then, upon receiving the ending command, the sub-control unit 90 performs processing to execute a predetermined ending performance based on the ending command.

If it is determined in S2105 that the jackpot end flag is ON (YES in S2105), the final round in the jackpot game has ended, so it is determined whether the jackpot ending time has elapsed, that is, whether the end timing of the ending period started in the above-mentioned processing of S2120 has arrived (S2122). As a result, if it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2122), this processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2122), the jackpot end flag is turned OFF (S2123), and the game state setting processing (S2124) described later is performed. Next, the jackpot flag is turned OFF (S2125), the special symbol operation status is set to "1" (S2126), and this processing ends. As a result, in the next interrupt processing, the special symbol waiting processing (S1102) will be executed again as the special symbol operation processing (S207).

The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that executes the above special electric device processing (S1107) functions as a "special game execution means."

[Game Status Setting Process]
As shown in FIG. 34, in the game state setting process (S2124), first, it is determined whether the jackpot game that has just ended is related to a jackpot with a probability of winning (S2201). In this embodiment, as described above, the 10R first jackpot, the 5R second jackpot, and the 10R fourth jackpot are considered to be jackpots with a probability of winning, so in S2201, it is determined whether the jackpot game that just ended is one of the three types. Then, if it is determined that the jackpot that just ended is a jackpot with a probability of winning (YES in S2201), the probability of winning is turned ON (S2202), the probability of winning counter is set to "10,000" (S2203), the time-saving flag is turned ON (S2204), and the time-saving counter is set to "10,000" (S2205), and the process is terminated.

Here, the value set in the probability counter is the number of times that a special symbol hit/miss judgment (in other words, a special symbol variable display) can be performed in a high probability state. In this embodiment, the value of "10,000" (10,000 times) is set, taking into consideration the probability of a big hit in a high probability state, the business hours of a gaming establishment in one day, and the number of special symbol hit/miss judgments that can be performed during the business hours, and the like, and is essentially the same as guaranteeing a high probability state until the next big hit occurs or until the business hours end. Therefore, when the game state is set to a high probability state, it can be said that the high probability state is guaranteed until the next big hit occurs (effectively the same). In addition, when the probability flag is ON, the time-saving counter is also set to "10,000", so it can be said that the time-saving state (open extension state) is also set while this high probability state is set. In other words, when the big hit game related to the probability big hit ends, the game state becomes a "high probability high base state" (second game state). As in this embodiment, the high probability high base state may be set to the high probability counter and time-saving counter by setting the value of "10,000," which effectively sets the high probability high base state until the next jackpot, or, if the high probability flag and time-saving flag are ON, control may be adopted to set the high probability high base state until the next jackpot occurs without setting a value in the counter.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S2201 that the jackpot is not a guaranteed jackpot (NO in S2201), that is, if the jackpot game that has ended this time is related to a non-guaranteed jackpot (regular jackpot), the time-saving flag is turned ON without turning ON the guaranteed jackpot flag (S2206), the time-saving counter is set to "100" (S2207), and the process ends. In this embodiment, as described above, the 5R third jackpot and the 10R fifth jackpot are two types of non-guaranteed jackpots (regular jackpots), so when a jackpot game related to either of these two types ends, the game state becomes a "low probability high base state" (first game state). The low probability high base state ends when one of the following conditions is met: the special symbol variable display is performed 100 times (the special symbol hit/fail judgment is performed 100 times), or the next jackpot occurs.

The time-saving counter and the probability of winning counter count the total number of times the first special symbol changes and the second special symbol changes. The values set (set) in the time-saving counter and the probability of winning counter are not limited to those in this embodiment, and can be set arbitrarily in consideration of the playability, ball output performance, specifications, etc. of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Also, different values may be set in each counter.

The main control unit 80 (game control microcomputer 81) that executes the above game status setting process (S2124) functions as a "game status control means."

[Reserved ball count processing]
As shown in FIG. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs reserved ball number processing (S208) following the special symbol operation processing (S207). As shown in FIG. 35, in the reserved ball number processing (S208), first, the reserved ball number of special symbol 1, the reserved ball number of special symbol 2, and the reserved ball number of normal symbols stored in the RAM of the main control board 80 are read (S2501). Next, command data including information (storage information) indicating the read reserved ball number is generated as a reserved ball number command, and the command is set in the output buffer of the RAM (S2502). The reserved ball number command is provided for each of the reserved ball number of special symbol 1, the reserved ball number of special symbol 2, and the reserved ball number of normal symbols, and includes the reserved ball number command of special symbol 1, the reserved ball number command of special symbol 2, and the reserved ball number command of normal symbols. Either or both of the reserved ball number command of special symbol 1 and the reserved ball number command of special symbol 2 are also referred to as the "reserved ball number command of special symbol". The reserved ball count command (memorized information) set in S2502 is output (sent to the sub-control unit 90) by the output process (S201) in the next interrupt process (S105).

The sub-control unit 90 that has received the reserved ball number command can analyze the received reserved ball number command to identify the current number of reserved balls for special pattern 1, the number of reserved balls for special pattern 2, and the number of reserved balls for normal patterns. Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved balls for special pattern has increased or decreased based on the received reserved ball number command for special pattern, the display contents of the effect reserved display area (first effect reserved display area 9c, second effect reserved display area 9d, variable reserved display area 9e) on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are updated accordingly. Specifically, for example, when the number of reserved balls for special pattern 1 increases by 1 from "3" to "4", the first effect reserved 9a corresponding to the increased number of reserved balls for special pattern 1 "4" is additionally displayed in the first effect reserved display area 9c. In addition, when the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 decreases by one from "2" to "1" (i.e., when the first special chart reservation is consumed), the first performance reservation 9a displayed at the left end of the first performance reservation display area 9c (the location corresponding to the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 of "1", see Figure 3) is moved to the variable reservation display area 9e, and accordingly, the first performance reservation 9a displayed in the first performance reservation display area 9c is moved (shifted) by one to the left (in the direction of decreasing the number of reservations).

When the number of reserved balls for the special chart is added by the above-mentioned S307 or S311, that is, the number of reserved balls for the special chart when a starting ball is entered, if the reserved ball number command for the special chart is a reserved ball number command for the special chart 1 (a command caused by S311), it is output (sent to the sub-control unit 90) by the output process (S201) together with the special chart 1 starting ball entry command set in the above-mentioned S323 (by the same interrupt), and if the reserved ball number command for the special chart 2 (a command caused by S307), it is output (sent to the sub-control unit 90) by the output process (S201) together with the special chart 2 starting ball entry command set in the above-mentioned S318 (by the same interrupt). This allows the sub-control unit 90 to receive the reserved ball number command for the special chart together with the starting ball entry command, and to link the reserved ball number (storage information) included in the reserved ball number command for the special chart with the result of the advance judgment (advance judgment result information) included in the start ball entry command, and process it on the sub-control unit 90 side.

In addition, information indicating the number of reserved balls of the special pattern when the number of reserved balls of the special pattern is added, i.e., information indicating the number of reserved balls of the special pattern associated with the start ball entry, may be included in the start ball entry command. In this case, since it is not necessary to set a command for the number of reserved balls of the special pattern associated with the start ball entry, it is possible to reduce the number of commands sent from the main control unit 80 to the sub-control unit 90. In addition, information indicating the number of reserved balls of the special pattern when the number of reserved balls of the special pattern is subtracted, i.e., information indicating the number of reserved balls of the special pattern associated with the start of the change of the special pattern (special pattern reserved consumption), may be included in the change start command. In this case, since it is not necessary to set a command for the number of reserved balls of the special pattern associated with the start of the change, it is possible to reduce the number of commands sent from the main control unit 80 to the sub-control unit 90. The same applies to normal patterns.

[Power off monitoring process]
As shown in Fig. 11, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the reserved ball count process (S208) followed by the power off monitoring process (S209). As shown in Fig. 36, in the power off monitoring process (S209), first, it is determined whether or not a power off signal has been input (S2601), and if there is no input (NO in S2601), the process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is a power off signal input (YES in S2601), data regarding the current state of the gaming machine (whether or not it is in a special mode, whether or not it is a winning game, how many reserved balls there are, how many times the special mode/time reduction is remaining, etc.) is stored in the RAM (S2602), the power off flag is turned ON (S2603), and then the loop process is performed without returning to the interrupt process (S105).

[Sub-control main processing]
Next, the operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 (performance control means) (control processing by the sub-controller 90) will be described with reference to Figures 37 to 43. Note that counters, flags, statuses, buffers, timers, etc. that appear in the description of the operation of the performance control microcomputer 91 are provided in the RAM of the sub-controller board 90 (sub-controller).

When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 begins, the performance control microcomputer 91 reads out the sub-control main processing program shown in FIG. 37 from the ROM of the sub-control board 90 and executes it. When the power is turned on, a power-on command is sent from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90, and the performance control microcomputer 91 reads out the sub-control main processing program from the ROM of the sub-control board 90 based on receiving the power-on command.

As shown in FIG. 37, in the sub-control main processing, first, CPU initialization processing is performed (S4001). In the CPU initialization processing (S4001), stack setting, constant setting, CPU 92 setting, SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller), etc. are performed, and various flags, statuses, and counters are reset.

Next, in S4002, it is determined whether the power-off signal is ON and the contents of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are normal (S4002). If the result of this determination is NO (NO in S4002), the RAM (predetermined storage area) of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003) and the process proceeds to S4004. On the other hand, if the result of the determination is YES (YES in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is not initialized and the process proceeds to S4004. In other words, if the power-off signal is not ON, or if the power-off signal is ON but the contents of the RAM are not normal (NO in S4002), the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized, but if the power-off signal is ON due to a power outage or the like but the contents of the RAM are maintained normal (YES in S4002), the RAM is not initialized. When the RAM is initialized, various flags, statuses, and counter values are reset.

The RAM (predetermined memory area) of the sub-control board 90 is also initialized when a RAM clear switch (not shown) is pressed when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, i.e., when the power is turned on with the RAM clear switch pressed (when a RAM clear command is received). Such initialization (RAM clearing) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 corresponds to one aspect of "initialization processing for initializing the memory contents of a predetermined memory area", and the performance control microcomputer 91 that executes the initialization (RAM clearing) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90 corresponds to one aspect of "initialization processing execution means".

Note that the processing of S4001 to S4003 is executed only once after the power is turned on (when the power is turned on), and is not executed thereafter. That is, as described above, when the power is turned on, a power-on command is sent from the main control board 80 to the sub-control board 90 (if the RAM clear switch is pressed, a RAM clear command is also sent), so the performance control microcomputer 91 executes the processing of S4001 to S4003 based on the reception of the power-on command (and the RAM clear command). In this embodiment, the performance control microcomputer 91 also performs processing similar to the power cut monitoring processing (S209) by the game control microcomputer 81 shown in FIG. 11, and when the power cut signal is turned ON due to a power cut or the like, the data related to the performance control at that time is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. In other words, the data related to the performance control at the time of the power cut due to a power cut or the like is backed up. Therefore, when the power is turned on after recovery from a power outage or other power outage (power recovery), unless the RAM of the sub-control board 90 is initialized (S4003), the state of performance control by the performance control microcomputer 91 will return to the state it was in before the power outage.

In S4004, interrupts are prohibited. Next, a random number seed update process is executed (S4005). In the random number seed update process (S4005), the values of various random number counters for determining effects are updated. The updated random number counter values are stored sequentially in a predetermined update value memory area (not shown) of the RAM of the sub-control board 90. The random numbers for determining effects include a random number for determining variable effects that determines the mode (variable effect pattern) of the effect pattern game effect to be executed, a random number for determining advance notice effects that determines advance notice effects, and a random number for determining effect patterns that determines effect patterns. The method of updating the random numbers can be the same as the random number update process performed by the main control board 80 described above. Note that when updating the random numbers, the random number values may be added by 2 instead of by 1.

The random number for determining the performance is acquired at a predetermined timing. This timing can be, for example, when a control signal (starting ball entry command) is sent from the main control board 80 notifying that a starting ball has been entered, when a control signal (starting ball entry command) is sent from the main control board 80 notifying the start of a fluctuation (starting fluctuation command), or when a fluctuation performance pattern, which will be described later, is decided. The acquired random number for determining the performance is stored in a specified random number counter value storage area (not shown) in the RAM of the sub-control board 90.

When the random number seed update process (S4005) is completed, the command transmission process is executed (S4006). In the command transmission process, various commands (control signals) stored in the output buffer (also called the "sub output buffer") in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 are sent to the control board that is the corresponding command destination, among the image control board 100, the sound control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. Each control board (each control unit) that receives the command executes various effects (effect pattern game effects, special game effects, etc.) using various effect devices (image display device 7, speaker 67, board lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable effect member 14, etc.) according to the received command.

The performance control microcomputer 91 then permits an interrupt (S4007). Thereafter, S4004 to S4007 are looped. While interrupts are permitted, it is possible to execute reception interrupt processing (S4008), 2 ms timer interrupt processing (S4009), and 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4010). By executing these control processes, it is possible to control the display of images (display objects) by the image display device 7 (display screen 7a) (display performance control), control the illumination of various lamps (illumination performance control), control the operation of the movable performance member 14 (movable performance control), and control the sound output from the speaker 67 (sound performance control), etc., as the game progresses.

[Receive interrupt processing]
38, in the reception interrupt process (S4008), it is determined (S4101) whether the strobe signal (STB signal) is ON, that is, whether the strobe signal sent from the main control board 80 has been input to the external INT input section of the performance control microcomputer 91. Then, in S4101, if it is determined that the strobe signal is not ON (NO in S4101), the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the strobe signal is ON (YES in S4101), the various commands sent from the main control board 80 are stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 (S4102), and the process ends. This reception interrupt process (S4008) is executed with priority over other interrupt processes (S4009, S4010).

[2ms timer interrupt processing]
The 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse with a 2 msec period is input to the sub-control board 90. As shown in FIG. 39, in the 2 ms timer interrupt process (S4009), first, an input process is performed to create switch data (edge data and level data) based on the detection signal from the performance button detection switches 63c and 63d (S4201). Next, a lamp data output process (S4202) is performed to output lamp data for illuminating various lamps (illumination members) such as the frame lamp 66 and the board lamp 5, and a drive data output process (S4203) is performed to output drive data for operating the movable performance member 14 (driving the drive means). The lamp data and drive data are created in the 10 ms timer interrupt process described later. Then, a watchdog timer process is performed to reset the watchdog timer (S4204).

[10 ms timer interrupt processing]
The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010) is a process executed every time an interrupt pulse with a 10 msec period is input to the sub-control board 90. As shown in FIG. 40, in the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4010), first, a received command analysis process (S4302) is performed, which will be described later. Next, a switch state acquisition process is performed (S4303) in which the switch data created in the 2 ms timer interrupt process is stored in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 as switch data for the 10 ms timer interrupt process, and a switch process is performed (S4304) in which the display contents of the display screen 7a are set based on the stored switch data. Then, other processes such as creating lamp data for illuminating the electric lighting member, creating drive data for operating the movable performance member 14 (driving the drive means), and updating the random number for performance determination are performed (S4305), and this process is terminated.

The drive data for the movable performance member 14 is created based on the variable performance pattern set in S4505 described below, or the operation pattern (movable performance pattern) of the movable performance member 14 included in the preview performance pattern set in S4506 described below when the preview performance pattern includes the operation of the movable performance member 14 (movable performance). In addition, the lamp data for the movable lamp 15, which is one of the illumination members, is created based on the variable performance pattern set in S4505 described below, the operation pattern (movable performance pattern) of the movable performance member 14, etc.

[Received command analysis process]
As shown in Fig. 41, in the received command analysis process (S4302), first, it is determined whether or not a start shot command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4390). If it is determined that a start shot command has been received (YES in S4390), the process proceeds to S4401 by performing steps S4395 to S4400, whereas if it is determined that a start shot command has not been received (NO in S4390), the process proceeds to S4401 without performing steps S4395 to S4400.

The effect pending information storage process of S4395 stores information based on the start entry command (special chart 1 start entry command or special chart 2 start entry command) received in S4390 as effect pending information in a specified effect pending information storage area provided in the RAM of the sub-control board 90. The effect pending information stored in the effect pending information storage area is used to execute various effects such as variable effects, preview effects, and effect modes, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 45, the effect pending information storage area has first memory areas 1-4 corresponding to the first special symbol and second memory areas 1-4 corresponding to the second special symbol, and each memory area is provided with an area for storing corresponding pre-determination result information (win/lose pre-determination result information, jackpot type pre-determination result information, and fluctuation pattern pre-determination result information) that can be specified based on the start ball entry command.

The first memory areas 1 to 4 are provided according to the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 ("4" in this embodiment). When a special symbol 1 start ball entry command is received, information (command data) based on the received special symbol 1 start ball entry command is stored in order, starting from first memory area 1. Then, each time the display of the first special symbol changes (the first reserved special symbol is consumed), the information in first memory area 1 is deleted. At this time, if information is stored in first memory area 2, that information is shifted to first memory area 1, if information is stored in first memory area 3, that information is shifted to first memory area 2, and if information is stored in first memory area 4, that information is shifted to first memory area 3.

The second memory areas 1 to 4 are provided according to the upper limit of the number of reserved balls for special symbol 2 ("4" in this embodiment). When a special symbol 2 start ball entry command is received, information (command data) based on the received special symbol 2 start ball entry command is stored in order, starting from second memory area 1. Then, each time the variable display of the second special symbol starts (the second reserved special symbol is consumed), the information in second memory area 1 is deleted. At this time, if information is stored in second memory area 2, that information is shifted to second memory area 1, if information is stored in second memory area 3, that information is shifted to second memory area 2, and if information is stored in second memory area 4, that information is shifted to second memory area 3.

When the performance control microcomputer 91 performs the performance pending information storage process (S4395), it checks whether there is an abnormality (abnormality or not) in the storage (storage contents) of the performance pending information by this process. Specifically, it checks whether there is any information based on the received start ball entry command that has been omitted (command missed), whether there is any inconsistency between the number of special reserved balls that can be specified based on the special reserved ball number command received together with the start ball entry command and the storage of the pre-determination result information (storage location, number of memories), whether there is any missed special reserved ball number command, etc.

For example, if the area storing new pre-determination result information based on the received start ball entry command is the "first memory area 3," and the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 identified based on the number of reserved balls command for special chart 1 received together with the start ball entry command is "3," then the storage of the pre-determination result information and the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 are consistent, and it can be determined that the storage of the reserved performance information by this performance reserved information storage process (S4395) was performed normally. In other words, if there are no abnormalities in both the start ball entry command (pre-determination result information) and the number of reserved balls command (storage information), it can be determined that the storage of the reserved performance information was performed normally.

In contrast, if the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 specified based on the reserved ball number command is "3" but no pre-judgment result information is stored in the first memory area 3 (the first memory area 3 is empty), or if the first memory area 3 stores hit/miss pre-judgment result information and no fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result information, or if the fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result information is stored and hit/miss pre-judgment result information is not stored, and some or all of the pre-judgment result information based on the start ball entry command is not stored in the corresponding memory area, it is possible that the start ball entry command was missed or the command was corrupted, and it can be determined that the storage of the performance hold information by this performance hold information storage process (S4395) was not performed normally. In other words, if there is an abnormality in the start ball entry command (pre-judgment result information), it can be determined that the storage of the performance hold information was not performed normally.

For example, if new pre-judgment result information based on the received start ball entry command is stored but the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 at the time of storage cannot be identified, or if the area in which the new pre-judgment result information is stored does not match the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 identified based on the received reserved ball number command for special chart 1 (for example, if the area in which the new pre-judgment result information is stored is the "first memory area 3" and the identified number of reserved balls for special chart 1 is "2"), it is possible that the reserved ball number command was missed or the command was corrupted, and it can be determined that the storage of the reserved effect information by this reserved effect information storage process (S4395) was not performed normally. In other words, if there is an abnormality in the reserved ball number command (storage information), it can be determined that the storage of the reserved effect information was not performed normally.

Furthermore, if the effect pending information storage process (S4395) has been performed (the start ball entry command has been received), but some or all of the new pre-determination result information based on the start ball entry command has not been stored in the corresponding memory area, and the number of reserved balls for the special chart cannot be identified, then it is possible that both the start ball entry command and the number of reserved balls command have been missed or the commands have been garbled, and it can be determined that the storage of the effect pending information by this effect pending information storage process (S4395) was not performed normally. In other words, if there is an abnormality in both the start ball entry command (pre-determination result information) and the number of reserved balls command (storage information), it can be determined that the storage of the effect pending information was not performed normally.

If the effect pending information storage process (S4395) is performed and it is confirmed that there is an abnormality in the storage (storage contents) of the effect pending information by this process (YES in S4397), that is, if there is an abnormality in at least one of the start ball entry command (pre-determination result information) received in S4390 and the special chart pending ball count command (storage information) received along with the start ball entry command, the advance notice effect restriction flag is turned ON (S4399) and processing proceeds to S4400. On the other hand, if it is confirmed that there is no abnormality in the information storage by the effect pending information storage process (S4395) (NO in S4397), processing proceeds to S4400 without performing processing of S4399.

The preview performance restriction flag is a flag for restricting the execution of performances (predetermined performances, preview performances) based on the performance pending information stored in the performance pending information storage area, i.e., performances based on pre-determination result information. When the preview performance restriction flag is OFF, the execution of performances based on pre-determination result information is permitted (performances based on pre-determination result information can be executed), and when it is ON, the execution of performances (predetermined performances, preview performances) based on pre-determination result information is restricted (prohibited) (performances based on pre-determination result information cannot be executed).

If an effect based on pre-determination result information is performed in a situation where an abnormality is found in the information stored by the effect pending information storage process (S4395) (the stored contents of the effect pending information storage area), there is a risk that an error (false information) will occur in the content of the effect, misleading the player. In this regard, in this embodiment, if an abnormality is found in the information stored by the effect pending information storage process (S4395), the execution of an effect based on pre-determination result information is restricted, making it possible to prevent an effect that misleads the player (an effect based on false information) from being performed. This makes it possible to avoid compromising the reliability of the effect and suppress a decline in interest in the game.

In this embodiment, after the notice performance restriction flag is turned ON, the state (notice performance restriction state) is maintained until a predetermined restriction release condition is met, and when the restriction release condition is met, the notice performance restriction flag is turned OFF, and the execution of the performance based on the advance judgment result information is permitted (made possible). Specifically, after the notice performance restriction flag is turned ON, the situation in which no abnormality is found in the storage of the performance pending information based on the reception of the start ball entry command (storage of the performance pending information is performed normally) continues until the start ball entry command is received a predetermined number of times (e.g., 10 times) (i.e., until the variable display of the special pattern based on a new start ball entry is performed a predetermined number of times), or when the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned back on, the restriction release condition is met and the notice performance restriction flag is turned OFF. In other words, the restriction release condition is that no abnormality is found in the storage of the performance pending information until the start ball entry command is received a predetermined number of times (e.g., 10 times), or the power of the pachinko game machine 1 is turned back on. The restriction release conditions are not limited to this, and may be, for example, that all reserved special symbols stored when an abnormality is found in the storage of the reserved effect information (when the advance notice restriction flag is ON) are consumed, or that the number of special symbol changes equivalent to the number of reserved special symbols (number of reserved special symbol balls) stored when an abnormality is found in the storage of the reserved effect information + α (α = 1 or more) is displayed.

The preview performance restriction flag and the performance control microcomputer 91 that controls the ON/OFF state of the preview performance restriction flag are also referred to as the "predetermined performance restriction means" or the "first restriction means."

Here, when the notice performance restriction flag is turned ON in S4399, that is, when it is recognized that there is an abnormality in at least one of the start ball entry command (preliminary judgment result information) received in S4390 and the special reserved ball number command (storage information) received together with the start ball entry command, the contents of the performance reserved information storage area can be initialized. In this way, at least the performance based on the performance reserved information (preliminary judgment result information) that existed when the abnormality was recognized in the storage contents of the performance reserved information storage area will not be executed, so this also makes it possible to prevent performances that mislead players from being executed. In addition, it is also possible to configure the storage contents of the performance reserved information storage area to be initialized when it is decided to execute a performance based on the pre-judgment result information (for example, a reserved icon notice, a special zone performance, a standby performance, etc., which will be described later). In this way, it is possible to prevent the performance based on the pre-judgment result information from being executed multiple times for the same pre-judgment result information, that is, the performance based on the pre-judgment result information from being executed in duplicate. In this way, by configuring the storage contents of the performance reserved information storage area to be initialized when a predetermined condition is established, it is possible to preferably execute a performance based on the pre-judgment result information.

The contents stored in the performance pending information storage area (performance pending information) do not contradict the contents stored in the special chart pending storage section (first special chart pending storage section, second special chart pending storage section) of the main control board 80 (acquired information, pending information), and the meanings of both are the same. For this reason, the performance pending information storage area of the sub-control board 90 can also be called an "acquired information storage means" or a "reserved storage means", and the performance pending information storage area is also simply called a "storage means".

The performance pending information is also called "pre-reading information", the special chart 1 performance pending information is also called "first pre-reading information", and the special chart 2 performance pending information is also called "second pre-reading information". The performance pending information storage area is also called "pre-reading information storage means", the special chart 1 performance pending information storage area is also called "first pre-reading information storage means", and the special chart 2 performance pending information storage area is also called "second pre-reading information storage means".

The hold icon notice process of S4400 is a process related to the hold icon notice, which is a type of notice effect based on the hold effect information (preliminary judgment result information) stored in S4395. The hold icon notice is an effect in which the display mode of the hold effect (hold icon) displayed on the display screen 7a is displayed in a different display mode (also called the "notice display mode") from the normal mode, suggesting the possibility (expectation) of a jackpot based on the notice display mode. The hold icon notice is also called the "hold change notice."

The pending icon announcement is a type of display effect that is performed on the display screen 7a, and can be executed based on the results of a pre-determination of whether or not the player will win, based on the results of a pre-determination of the type of jackpot (if the pre-determination of whether or not the player will win is a jackpot), or based on the results of a pre-determination of the fluctuation pattern. The pending icon announcement process (S4400) will be described later.

In S4401, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4401). If it is determined that a fluctuation start command has been received (YES in S4401), the fluctuation performance start process (S4402) described below is performed and processing proceeds to S4403, and if it is determined that a fluctuation start command has not been received (NO in S4401), processing proceeds to S4403 without performing processing of S4402.

In S4403, it is determined whether or not a change stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4403). If it is determined that a change stop command has been received (YES in S4403), a change performance end process is performed to stop the display of the performance pattern and end the change performance (S4404). In the change performance end process (S4404), a change performance end command for stopping the display of the performance pattern 8 and ending the change performance is set in the sub output buffer. When the set change performance end command is sent to the image control board 100 by the command sending process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 stops the display of the performance pattern 8 that was changing on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (confirmed stop) and ends the change performance (performance pattern game performance). On the other hand, if it is determined that a change stop command has not been received in S4403 (NO in S4403), the process proceeds to S4405 without performing the process of S4404.

The sub-controller 90 (microcomputer 91 for controlling presentation), which executes the variable presentation start process (S4402) and the variable presentation end process (S4404), also functions as a "variable game execution means (variable display execution means)." Note that variable presentation refers to various presentations that are performed in accordance with the variable game from the start of the variable display of the special pattern to its end (stop display), such as the variable display and stop display of the presentation pattern 8, and the reach presentation described below. The variable presentation performed on the display screen 7a is a type of display presentation.

In S4405, it is determined whether a jackpot game-related command has been received from the main control board 80 (S4405). A jackpot game-related command is a command sent from the main control board 80 when a jackpot game is executed, and specifically includes an opening command sent at the start of a jackpot game (occurrence of a jackpot) (see S2010), a round start command sent at the start of a round (see S2107), a round end command sent at the end of a round (see S2114), and an ending command sent at the end of a jackpot game (see S2119). In S4405, it is determined whether any of these jackpot game-related commands have been received, and if not (NO in S4405), the process proceeds to S4407, and if received (YES in S4405), a jackpot game-related performance process is performed to execute a performance corresponding to the type of command received (S4406).

For example, if the received command is an opening command, an opening effect command that specifies an opening effect according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command is set in the sub-output buffer. If the received command is a round start command, a round effect command that specifies a round effect according to the round specified based on the command is set in the sub-output buffer. If the received command is an ending command, an ending effect command that specifies an ending effect according to the type of jackpot specified based on the command is set in the sub-output buffer. When these set jackpot-related effect commands are sent to the image control board 100 by the command sending process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 executes effects related to the jackpot game such as opening effects, round effects, and ending effects (also called "jackpot game effects" or "jackpot game related effects") on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 according to the progress of the jackpot game. The jackpot game effects (jackpot game related effects) performed on the display screen 7a are a type of display effect.

Finally, S4407 is processed, and this process ends. In S4407, other processes are performed, for example, processes based on other received commands other than the various commands mentioned above (for example, a normal symbol change start command or a normal symbol change stop command).

[Variable performance start processing]
Next, the variable performance start process (S4402) executed in the received command analysis process (S4302) will be described. As shown in FIG. 42, in the variable performance start process (S4402), first, a random number process for determining performance is performed to acquire various random numbers for determining performance, such as a random number for determining variable performance, a random number for determining notice performance, and a random number for determining performance patterns (S4501). In this embodiment, the process of S4501 is performed at the timing when the variable start command is received from the main control unit 80, and a predetermined value (acquired information) is acquired from each random number. Based on this acquired value (acquired information), the mode of the performance pattern game performance (variable performance), the mode of the notice performance, the performance pattern to be displayed, etc. are determined.

Next, in S4502, the variation start command received in S4401 is analyzed (S4502). The variation start command includes a variation pattern designation command (information for designating a variation pattern) that designates the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern selection process for the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The information for designating the variation pattern includes information indicating the type of variation pattern (P1 to P18) (see FIG. 9A and FIG. 9B), game state information that designates the current game state, the result of the first special symbol hit/miss judgment or the second special symbol hit/miss judgment, and pattern information that designates the type of big win (see FIG. 8). In addition, since there are variation pattern designation commands corresponding to the first special symbol and those corresponding to the second special symbol, by analyzing the variation pattern designation command, it is possible to determine whether the currently started performance pattern game performance (performance pattern change display) is related to the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2. Note that the variation pattern information, game state information, pattern information, etc. can also be used in processes other than the variation performance start process executed after this.

Next, in S4503, the current mode status is referenced (S4503). The mode status is used to determine the presentation mode to be executed. The mode status is a value between "1" and "5", and each value is assigned to presentation modes A to E. Specifically, mode status "1" corresponds to presentation mode A, mode status "2" corresponds to presentation mode B, mode status "3" corresponds to presentation mode C, mode status "4" corresponds to presentation mode D, and mode status "5" corresponds to presentation mode E. By referencing the current mode status, it is possible to identify the current presentation mode.

Here, the presentation mode refers to the presentation format (presentation environment) when variable play is executed (variable play state), and when the presentation mode is different, some or all of the presentation aspects of various display presentations such as the background of the display screen 7a, variable presentation, reach presentation, and notice presentation are different. Specifically, some or all of the presentation images (presentation display) displayed on the image display device 7 are different depending on the presentation mode, such as the display aspect (for example, pattern design, number design, etc.) of the presentation pattern 8 being different, or the characters, items, and background images that appear being different. In addition, the presentation pattern game presentation and the big win game presentation can also be executed in a manner according to the presentation mode, and when multiple game presentations (preview presentation, reach presentation, round presentation, etc.) are provided, it is possible to execute different game presentations depending on the presentation mode. The presentation mode is also called the "variable mode", and the presentation control microcomputer 91 that executes the control related to the setting of the presentation mode (mode status) is also called the "variable mode setting means".

In this embodiment, the presentation modes A and B are presentation modes that can be executed when the game state is a low-probability low-base state, the presentation mode C is a presentation mode that can be executed when the game state is a low-probability high-base state, the presentation mode D is a presentation mode that can be executed when the game state is a high-probability high-base state, and the presentation mode E is a presentation mode that can be executed in both cases of the low-probability high-base state and the high-probability high-base state. Therefore, when the presentation mode is any of "A" to "D", the player can understand whether the current game state is a low-probability low-base state, a low-probability high-base state (time-saving state), or a high-probability high-base state (probability-changing game state) by checking the presentation mode. On the other hand, when the presentation mode is "E", it is difficult (impossible) for the player to understand (distinguish) whether the current game state is a low-probability high-base state (time-saving state) or a high-probability high-base state (probability-changing game state) even if he checks the presentation mode. In that sense, the presentation mode E can be called a "game state non-notification mode".

Next, in S4504, a variable performance pattern determination table (not shown) is set to determine the execution pattern (also called the "variable performance pattern") of the variable performance using the performance pattern, etc. based on the result of the special pattern hit/miss determination (S4504). Specifically, the variable performance pattern determination table to be used is set based on the mode status (current performance mode) referenced in S4503 and the variable pattern designation command received from the main control unit 80.

For example, if the fluctuation pattern information specified by the received fluctuation pattern specification command is "P1 (fluctuation pattern P1)" (see FIG. 9A), the jackpot-time fluctuation presentation pattern determination table corresponding to the current presentation mode is set as the fluctuation presentation pattern determination table. In this embodiment, since multiple fluctuation presentation pattern determination tables corresponding to the presentation modes (mode status) are pre-stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, in S4504, from among these fluctuation presentation pattern determination tables, a table corresponding to the mode status (current presentation mode) referenced in S4503 is selected and set.

The variable presentation pattern determination table is primarily used to determine the execution mode of the presentation pattern game presentation (such as the variation mode of the presentation pattern), and multiple variable presentation pattern determination tables corresponding to the presentation mode (mode status) are pre-stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90. In S4504, from among these variable presentation pattern determination tables, a table corresponding to the mode status (current presentation mode) referenced in S4503 is selected and set.

Next, in S4505, a variable performance pattern that matches the specified variable performance pattern (special symbol variable performance pattern) is determined (selected) and set (S4505) based on the random number for determining the variable performance obtained in S4501 and the variable performance pattern determination table set in S4504. Since the special symbol variable performance pattern specifies the variable time of the special symbol, i.e., the execution time of the variable game (see Figures 9A and 9B), the execution time (execution period) of the variable performance based on the variable performance pattern set in S4505 will conform to the special symbol variable performance pattern. Also, since the special symbol variable performance pattern specifies the content of the variable performance (see Figures 9A and 9B), the content (execution mode) of the variable performance based on the variable performance pattern set in S4505 will conform to the special symbol variable performance pattern.

The variable presentation pattern mainly sets the variable mode of the presentation pattern 8 displayed in the presentation pattern display area 7b (the execution mode of the presentation pattern game presentation). This determines the detailed execution mode of the presentation, such as whether or not a reach presentation is executed in the presentation pattern game presentation (variable presentation). A variable presentation that executes (includes) a reach presentation is also called a "variable presentation with reach," and a variable presentation that does not execute (does not include) a reach presentation is also called a "variable presentation without reach."

The reach effect is, for example, when the result of the special pattern hit/miss judgment indicates a jackpot, and the display mode of the effect pattern 8 is a mode in which all three effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same (double number) (win pattern arrangement, special display mode), two of the three effect patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R (for example, the left effect pattern 8L and the right effect pattern 8R) are displayed (temporarily stopped) as patterns (also called "reach patterns" or "reach modes") that make up the win pattern arrangement (special display mode), and the remaining one (for example, the middle effect pattern 8C) continues to be displayed in a variable manner (also called "reach state"), and the effect indicates whether the remaining one effect pattern will be displayed as a pattern that completes the win pattern arrangement. This reach effect makes it possible to effectively stimulate the expectation of players aiming for a jackpot. The reach effect performed on the display screen 7a is a type of display effect.

The variable performance pattern includes not only the variable mode of the performance symbol 8, but also the execution mode (performance pattern) of the display performance, sound performance, light-emitting performance, movable performance, etc. that are executed in conjunction with the variable display of the performance symbol 8, and whether or not these performances are executed is also determined (S4505). For this reason, the display performance, sound performance, light-emitting performance, movable performance, etc. that are executed in conjunction with the variable performance can be called a variable performance. In other words, in S4505, various performance modes related to the variable performance, including the variable mode of the performance symbol 8, are determined based on the result of the special pattern hit/miss judgment (performance mode determination means).

In addition, in S4505, the effect pattern 8 (also called the "stop effect pattern") to be displayed is determined and set based on the effect pattern determination random number obtained in S4501 and a stop pattern determination table (not shown). The stop effect pattern constitutes the reach pattern, winning pattern arrangement, and losing pattern arrangement of the effect pattern 8. There are two types of stop display: a definite stop display (also called simply a "definite stop") that definitely displays the effect pattern 8, and a tentative stop display (also called simply a "tentative stop") that definitely displays the effect pattern 8.

A temporary stop means that the variable display (e.g., scroll display) of the performance pattern 8 is temporarily stopped (paused), and the performance pattern 8 is temporarily stopped and displayed at a predetermined stop position on the display screen 7a. The temporarily stopped performance pattern can be displayed in a slightly moving state or in a stationary state. The stop display of each pattern when the three performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the order of the first stop pattern, the second stop pattern, and the third stop pattern before the variable display ends also corresponds to a temporary stop. On the other hand, a fixed stop means that the variable display of the performance pattern 8 ends and the performance pattern 8 is displayed in a completely stationary state at a predetermined stop position on the display screen 7a (e.g., the performance pattern display area 7b). When the performance pattern 8 is fixedly stopped after the variable display, the display result of the variable display (the result of the variable performance) is fixedly displayed (fixed display) (derived display). In other words, the performance pattern 8 is fixedly stopped with the end of the variable display of the special pattern (i.e., the stop display of the special pattern). Therefore, the provisional stopping of the performance pattern 8 can be performed once or multiple times until it is finally stopped.

The stop effect patterns determined (selected) in S4505 are the provisionally stopping patterns (also called "provisional stopping patterns") and the definite stopping patterns (also called "definite stopping patterns"). For example, the effect pattern 8 that is displayed as stopped (definitely stopped) as a result of the variable effect, i.e., the definite stopping pattern, is a variance such as "787" (also called "reach miss" or "reach pattern arrangement") if the result of the special pattern hit/miss is a reach miss, and is a reach miss, and is a variance such as "635" or "655" (also called "completely hit" or "non-reach pattern arrangement") if it is a reach miss.

In addition, in a low-probability, low-base state, if the result of the special pattern hit/miss judgment (first special pattern hit/miss judgment) is a hit and the hit is a 5R hit (general hit), the confirmed stopping pattern of the performance pattern 8 is a repeat number pattern other than "777", and if it is a 10R first hit (general hit), the confirmed stopping pattern of the performance pattern 8 is a repeat number pattern of "777". On the other hand, in a low-probability, high-base state or a high-probability, high-base state, if the result of the special pattern hit/miss judgment (second special pattern hit/miss judgment) is a hit and the hit is a 10R 9th hit (general hit), the confirmed stopping pattern of the performance pattern 8 is a repeat number pattern other than "777" (winning pattern arrangement), and if it is a 10R 8th hit (general hit), the confirmed stopping pattern of the performance pattern 8 is a repeat number pattern of "777". In this way, the repeated number "777" is the guaranteed result for a 10R special jackpot, which is the most advantageous jackpot for players.

In addition, in a low probability, low base state, if the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment (first special symbol hit/miss judgment) is a jackpot, and the jackpot is any of the 10R second to fifth jackpots (special jackpot), the confirmed stopping pattern of the performance pattern 8 is a specific one of the spread patterns. This specific spread pattern notifies the winning (occurrence) of a special jackpot by a pattern arrangement similar to the losing pattern arrangement, and is a type of winning pattern arrangement (special display mode). The specific spread pattern is also called a "special pattern arrangement."

A specific pattern arrangement (special symbol arrangement) can be configured with a certain pattern arrangement, such as a pattern arrangement consisting of a sequence such as "123" or "567", or a pattern arrangement consisting of three non-identical red symbols (3, 7) such as "373" or "773". In addition, it can be configured with a pattern arrangement in which at least one of the three performance symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R (for example, the middle performance symbol 8C) is a symbol that is not usually displayed.

The stop display mode (pattern arrangement) of the performance pattern 8 described above is an example, and what is displayed as the stop performance pattern can be changed as appropriate. The provisional stop pattern and the final stop pattern determined in S4505 may be either the same stop display mode or different stop display modes. If the provisional stop pattern is different from the final stop pattern, the final stop pattern can be finally displayed after the performance pattern is changed again after the provisional stop (re-change display, re-change performance), etc. In one change display of the special pattern (from the start of change to the final stop), the three performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed and then temporarily stopped, and the change display is then resumed. This is called a "pseudo consecutive performance", and the pseudo consecutive performance is also simply called "pseudo consecutive".

In addition, in S4505, the judgment pattern 8s (also called the "stop judgment pattern") to be displayed in the judgment pattern display area 7c is determined and set. The type of stop display of the judgment pattern 8s is only the confirmed stop display (confirmed stop). As described above, the judgment pattern 8s is displayed in a fluctuating manner in synchronization with the fluctuating display of the special pattern, and is displayed in a stopped manner in synchronization with the stopped display of the special pattern, and mainly functions as a pattern indicating the fluctuating status of the special pattern. For this reason, the stop judgment pattern set in S4505 is a pattern that is a confirmed stop (confirmed stop pattern). In this embodiment, the confirmed stop pattern of the judgment pattern 8s is set to a confirmed stop pattern with the same pattern (number pattern) arrangement as the confirmed stop pattern of the performance pattern 8. Note that at least the miss pattern arrangement (miss confirmed stop pattern) among the confirmed stop patterns of the judgment pattern 8s may be a common (one type) pattern arrangement regardless of the miss pattern arrangement (miss confirmed stop pattern) of the performance pattern 8.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, multiple modes (variable presentation patterns) such as normal reach presentation and super reach presentation are provided as the variation modes (variable presentation patterns) of the presentation pattern 8. In S4505, it is determined which of these presentations will be performed, or whether these presentations will not be performed (this is also called "normal variation"), based on the variation presentation pattern determination table. In the following, normal reach may be referred to as "NM reach" and super reach may be referred to as "SP reach".

For example, when a reach variable performance is executed, one of the reach performances is set based on the variable pattern designation command and the variable performance pattern determination table. Here, when an SP reach performance is executed, it is set so that the possibility of a jackpot is higher than when an NM reach performance is executed. In other words, it can be said that the SP reach performance is a game performance with a higher possibility of a jackpot (jackpot expectation) than the NM reach performance.

In this embodiment, when the sub-control board 90 receives a fluctuation pattern designation command from the main control board 80 that designates a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 30,000 ms (30 seconds) or more (see Figures 9A and 9B), a reach performance (fluctuation performance with reach) can be set (executed) based on the command. When the fluctuation time is 30,000 ms (30 seconds), an NM reach performance is set (executed) as the reach performance, and when the fluctuation time is 45,000 ms (45 seconds) or more, an SP reach performance is set (executed) as the reach performance. A fluctuation performance in which an NM reach performance is executed without an SP reach performance (not including an SP reach performance) is also called an "NM reach fluctuation performance", a fluctuation performance in which an SP reach performance is executed (including an SP reach performance) is also called an "SP reach fluctuation performance", and NM reach fluctuation performance and SP reach fluctuation performance are collectively called "reach fluctuation performance".

Here, the change display (change display) of the performance pattern 8 is basically performed as follows. First, when the special pattern hit/miss judgment is executed and the change display of the special pattern starts, the three performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start changing display accordingly. Then, the change speed of the three performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R becomes high speed and approximately constant, and when a predetermined time has passed from the start of the change, the change speed of the first stop pattern (left performance pattern 8L in this embodiment) decreases and the first stop pattern stops (temporarily stops). Next, the change speed of the second stop pattern (right performance pattern 8R in this embodiment) decreases and the second stop pattern stops (temporarily stops), and finally the change speed of the third stop pattern (middle performance pattern 8C in this embodiment) decreases and the third stop pattern stops (temporarily stops). After this, the three performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixed and stopped and displayed in a miss pattern arrangement or a hit pattern arrangement, and the display result of the change display is derived and displayed, and one change display ends. Normal fluctuations and reach effects are carried out based on this flow from the start to the end of the fluctuation display.

Specifically, for example, when the function to shorten the time for changing the special pattern according to the number of reserved balls or the game state is not activated (when the function to shorten the time for changing is not activated), when the three performance patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change, the left performance pattern 8L (first stop pattern) stops (temporarily stops) at a timing when a predetermined time (for example, 9 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the change, followed by the right performance pattern 8R (second stop pattern) stops (temporarily stops). At this time, if the left and right performance patterns 8L and 8R stop (temporarily stops) with the same number pattern (reach state), a reach is established, and then a reach performance (NM reach performance or SP reach performance) is executed (for example, change patterns P1 to P7). In the case of a SP reach performance (for example, change patterns P1 to P6), the SP reach performance is executed after the NM reach performance (developing from the NM reach performance to the SP reach performance). When a reach effect is executed, the reach effect is followed and the three effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a miss pattern arrangement or a win pattern arrangement.

On the other hand, if the reach is not established when the left and right performance patterns 8L and 8R stop (temporarily stop) (for example, the change pattern P8), the change is considered to be a normal change, and the center performance pattern 8C (third stop pattern) stops (temporarily stop) following the stop (temporarily stop) of the right performance pattern 8R (second stop pattern). In this embodiment, in the normal change, the time it takes from the start of the change of the performance pattern 8 until the third stop pattern (in this embodiment, the center performance pattern 8C) stops (temporarily stop) is about 11 seconds. However, in the normal change when the change time shortening function of the special pattern is activated (for example, the change patterns P9, P10, P18), the time it takes from the start of the change until the left performance pattern 8L (first stop pattern) stops (temporarily stop) is shorter than normal (when the change time shortening function is not activated), and accordingly, the time it takes for the right performance pattern 8R (second stop pattern) and the center performance pattern 8C (third stop pattern) to stop (temporarily stop) is also shorter.

Depending on the change presentation pattern set in S4505 and the preview presentation pattern set in S4506 described below, the order and timing of the display of the stopped presentation patterns may differ from the above-mentioned manner, for example, the three presentation patterns 8L, 8C, and 8R may stop (temporarily stop) all at the same time after the start of the display of the changing presentation pattern 8, or all the patterns may continue to change even after a predetermined time (e.g. 9 seconds) has elapsed until the first stopped pattern stops.

In this embodiment, the variation presentation pattern that can be set in S4505 corresponds to the special chart variation pattern. For example, if the special chart variation pattern to be executed is variation pattern P1, a variation presentation pattern for a jackpot including SP Reach A is set (see FIG. 9A).

In this embodiment, multiple reach effects (reach effect patterns) are provided, and one of the reach effect patterns is set according to the variation time (variation pattern of 30,000 ms or more) in which the reach effect can be executed (S4505). Normal reach, SP reach A, and SP reach B are provided as reach effects that can be executed in a non-time-saving state, and of these, normal reach corresponds to the case where the result of the hit/miss judgment is a miss (variation pattern P7), and SP reach A and B correspond to the case where the result of the hit/miss judgment is a jackpot (variation patterns P1, P2, P3) and the case where the result of the hit/miss judgment is a miss (variation patterns P4, P5, P6) (see FIG. 9A). On the other hand, normal reach, SP reach C, and SP reach D are provided as reach effects that can be executed in a time-saving state, and each of them corresponds to the case where the result of the hit/miss judgment is a jackpot (variation patterns P11, 12, 13) and the case where the result of the hit/miss judgment is a miss (variation patterns P14, 15, 16) (see FIG. 9B). The reason why a normal reach for a jackpot (normal reach jackpot) is provided during the time-saving mode is to allow for efficient use of not only miss fluctuations but also jackpot fluctuations.

Each of the SP reaches A to D has a number of presentation patterns (execution modes of the SP reach presentation) with different contents of the SP reach presentation (development presentation). For example, there are three types of SP reaches A: a first SP reach A in which the character appearing in the SP reach presentation is character A1 (first character) and the story (plot) of the SP reach presentation is story A1 (first story); a second SP reach A in which the character appearing in the SP reach presentation is character A2 (second character) and the story (plot) of the SP reach presentation is story A2 (second story); and a third SP reach A in which the character appearing in the SP reach presentation is character A3 (third character) and the story (plot) of the SP reach presentation is story A3 (third story).

Therefore, when a command specifying fluctuation pattern P1 is received as a fluctuation pattern specification command from the main control board 80, in S4505, one of the first SP reach A (first execution mode), the second SP reach A (second execution mode), and the third SP reach A (third execution mode) is selected and set as the SP reach A based on a fluctuation performance pattern determination table (not shown). In other words, the fluctuation performance (reach fluctuation performance) accompanying the fluctuation display of the special pattern based on fluctuation pattern P1 may be executed in a mode that results in a jackpot via the first SP reach A, in a mode that results in a jackpot via the second SP reach A, or in a mode that results in a jackpot via the third SP reach A. Also, when a command specifying the fluctuation pattern P4 is received as a fluctuation pattern specification command from the main control board 80, in S4505, one of the first SP reach A (first execution mode), the second SP reach A (second execution mode), and the third SP reach A (third execution mode) is selected and set as the SP reach A based on a fluctuation performance pattern determination table (not shown). In other words, the fluctuation performance (reach fluctuation performance) accompanying the fluctuation display of the special pattern based on the fluctuation pattern P4 may be executed in a mode that results in a miss via the first SP reach A, in a mode that results in a miss via the second SP reach A, or in a mode that results in a miss via the third SP reach A. The same applies to other SP reaches and fluctuation patterns.

In this way, in this embodiment, for special chart fluctuation patterns (predetermined fluctuation patterns) with a fluctuation time of 45,000 ms or more, multiple SP reach presentation patterns (execution modes) that can be executed for one special chart fluctuation pattern are provided. This makes it possible to diversify the fluctuation presentation, including the SP reach presentation, and to enhance the presentation effect of the fluctuation presentation.

In addition, in this embodiment, there are cases where SP reach B is executed via pseudo-consecutive hits (variation patterns P2, P5) and cases where SP reach B is executed without pseudo-consecutive hits (variation patterns P3, P6) (see Figure 9A). In other words, there are presentation patterns for SP reach B that goes via pseudo-consecutive hits (also called "pseudo-consecutive SP reach B") and SP reach B that does not go via pseudo-consecutive hits (also called "non-pseudo-consecutive SP reach B"). This makes it possible to prevent the presentation development from becoming uniform and to enhance the presentation effect. The combination of pseudo-consecutive hits and reach hits can also be applied to presentation patterns other than SP reach B.

The selection rate of the SP Reach A presentation pattern determined by the variation presentation pattern determination table can be configured so that, for example, in the case of variation pattern P1 (jackpot variation), the selection rate increases in the order of 3rd SP Reach A, 2nd SP Reach A, and 1st SP Reach A, and in the case of variation pattern P4 (miss variation), the selection rate increases in the order of 1st SP Reach A, 2nd SP Reach A, and 3rd SP Reach A, so that the jackpot expectation rate is highest when the 1st SP Reach A is executed among the SP Reach A, and the jackpot expectation rate decreases in the order of 2nd SP Reach A, 3rd SP Reach A. The configuration related to the type of SP reach and the selection rate is the same for SP reaches B to D. The type of SP reach (SP reach type) and the number of presentations are not limited to those shown in this embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate depending on the playability and specifications of the pachinko game machine 1.

Next, in S4506, processing related to setting the preview effect (preview effect setting processing) is performed (S4506). A preview effect is an effect that gives suggestions regarding the variable display currently being executed or the stored pending (variable display to be executed later), for example, an effect that suggests the possibility (hope of a jackpot) that the display result of the variable display currently being executed will be a specific display result (or special display result) or suggests the possibility (hope of a jackpot) that the display result of the variable display to be executed later will be a specific display result (or special display result).

In this embodiment, various types of preview effects can be executed, such as a preview effect based on the performance hold information (preliminary judgment result) stored in S4395 (also called "pre-read preview") and a preview effect related to the current (present) variable display (also called "variation") (also called "variation preview"). In response to this, multiple preview effect patterns are provided. Preview effects are executed, for example, by displaying an image (also called "pre-preview image" or "pre-preview information") that suggests the probability of a big win on the display screen 7a (also called "pre-preview display"). In addition to display effects (pre-preview displays), preview effects can also be executed by sound effects, light effects, and moving effects, and can also be executed by combining these effects. In other words, preview effect patterns include execution modes such as display effects, sound effects, light-emitting effects, and moving effects. When a preview effect is executed, one of the multiple preview effects may be executed for one special reserved chart or one variable display, or two or more preview effects may be executed. In other words, it is possible to execute at least some of the multiple preview effects.

In S4506, it is determined whether or not each preview performance is to be executed (pre-execution status), and the performance mode (pre-examination performance pattern) of the preview performance to be executed is set. Specifically, based on the preview performance determination random number obtained in S4501 and a preview performance determination table (not shown) stored in the ROM of the sub-control board 90, it is determined whether or not to execute the preview performance and the preview performance pattern, and the preview performance pattern is set based on the result of this determination.

There are multiple preview performance determination tables, and the table to be used (referenced) in S4506 is determined according to the contents of the performance hold information stored in S4395 (preliminary judgment result), the result of the special pattern hit/miss judgment specified by the analysis result of the fluctuation start command in S4502 (hit/miss judgment result related to the current special pattern fluctuation display), and the special pattern fluctuation pattern information specified by the analysis result of the fluctuation start command (fluctuation pattern and stop pattern related to the current special pattern fluctuation display). In other words, in S4506, the preview performance pattern (preliminary performance mode) is determined by random number lottery based on the pre-judgment result (holding advance reading result), the hit/miss judgment result related to the current special pattern fluctuation display, the fluctuation pattern, etc. (performance mode determination means).

The preview performance setting process (S4506) performs processing related to the preview performance (hold pre-reading preview, said change preview) that can be executed at a specified time, including during the variable display (variable performance) of the performance pattern 8, triggered by the start of said variable display (variable performance), and the preview performance related to the processing here does not include the hold icon preview (a type of hold pre-reading preview) that accompanies the occurrence of a starting ball. In other words, the processing related to setting the hold icon preview that accompanies the occurrence of a starting ball is not performed in the preview performance setting process (S4506), but in the hold icon preview process (S4400) described below.

Here, the preview performance (reserved preview performance) executed based on the performance pending information (pre-reading information) is also called the "pre-reading performance" or "pre-performance", the preview performance executed based on the special chart 1 performance pending information (first pre-reading information) is also called the "first pre-reading performance" or "first pre-performance", and the preview performance executed based on the special chart 2 performance pending information (second pre-reading information) is also called the "second pre-reading performance" or "second pre-performance".

In the preview performance setting process (S4506), the execution/non-execution determination and preview performance pattern setting for the reserved read-ahead preview (preview performance) are performed when the preview performance restriction flag described above is OFF, and are not performed when the preview performance restriction flag is ON. In other words, as described above, if there is an abnormality in the storage of the performance reserved information, the execution of the reserved read-ahead preview is restricted (prohibited). On the other hand, for the variable preview, the execution/non-execution determination and the preview performance pattern setting are performed regardless of the setting status of the preview performance restriction flag. For this reason, while the execution of the reserved read-ahead preview may be restricted (prohibited), the execution of the variable preview is not restricted (prohibited). As a result, even if the execution of the reserved read-ahead preview is restricted, the variable preview can be executed, so it is possible to suppress a decrease in the performance effect.

Next, in S4507, a variable performance start command for starting a variable performance, etc. based on the variable performance pattern set in S4505 and the preview performance pattern set in S4506 is set in the sub-output buffer (S4507), and the variable performance start process is completed. When the variable performance start command set in S4507 is sent to the image control board 100 by the command sending process (S4006), the image control microcomputer 101 reads out from the ROM of the image control board 100 the variable performance pattern specified based on the variable performance start command, i.e., the predetermined variable performance image data (image data showing the start of the change, during change, stop of change, etc. of the performance pattern 8) corresponding to the variable performance pattern set in S4505, and the preview performance pattern specified based on the variable performance start command, i.e., the predetermined preview performance image data corresponding to the preview performance pattern set in S4506, and executes the variable performance and preview performance based on the read image data on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the variable display of the judgment pattern 8s displayed in the judgment pattern display area 7c is also executed. Furthermore, based on the variable performance pattern or preview performance pattern specified based on the variable performance start command, various performances such as sound performance, light performance, and moving performance (gimmick performance) are executed by the corresponding performance devices (speaker 67, board lamp 5, frame lamp 66, movable performance member 14, etc.).

[Pending icon notice processing]
Next, the pending icon notice process (S4400) executed based on the reception of the start-entry command from the main control board 80 (YES in S4390) will be described. As shown in FIG. 43, in the pending icon notice process (S4400), first, it is determined whether the notice performance restriction flag is OFF or not (S4600). As described above, the notice performance restriction flag is a flag that is turned ON in S4399 when there is an abnormality in the storage (storage contents) of the performance pending information by S4395, and when the notice performance restriction flag is ON, the execution of the performance based on the performance pending information (preliminary judgment result information specified by the start-entry command) is restricted. Since the pending icon notice is a type of performance based on the performance pending information (preliminary judgment result information), the setting status of the notice performance restriction flag is determined (confirmed).

If it is determined in S4600 that the preview performance restriction flag is not OFF (NO in S4600), i.e., if the preview performance restriction flag is ON, this process ends without carrying out the processing from S4601 onwards. As a result, while the preview performance restriction flag is ON, new pending icon previews (some new preview performances) will not be executed (started) (the execution of new pending icon previews is restricted). In contrast, if it is determined in S4600 that the preview performance restriction flag is OFF (YES in S4600), it is determined whether the pending icon preview flag is OFF (S4601).

The reserved icon notice flag is a flag indicating whether or not a reserved icon notice is being executed. When a reserved icon notice is executed, it is turned ON in S4605 described later, and is turned OFF based on the end of the variable display (variable play) corresponding to the special reserved (also called the "reserved to be notified") that triggered the execution of the reserved icon notice. For this reason, when a performance hold displayed in a notice display mode in the performance hold display area (first performance hold display area 9c or second performance hold display area 9d) moves to the variable reserve display area 9e, until the variable display (variable play) corresponding to the performance hold (reserved to be notified) ends, even if a new performance hold is displayed (additionally displayed) in the performance hold display area (first performance hold display area 9c, second performance hold display area 9d), the new performance hold will not be displayed in a notice display mode. This makes it possible to make the player have a sense of expectation for a jackpot for the currently executed variable play (variable play corresponding to the reserved to be notified).

The hold icon notice may be turned off when the variable display (variable play) corresponding to the special reserve that triggered the execution of the hold icon notice begins (when the special reserve is consumed). In this case, while the reserve effect is displayed in a notice display mode in the variable reserve display area 9e, the newly displayed (additionally displayed) reserve effect can be displayed in a notice display mode in the reserve effect display area (first reserve effect display area 9c, second reserve effect display area 9d), so that in addition to the currently executed variable play, the player can be made to feel excited about the variable play corresponding to the subsequent special reserve effect (reserve subject to notice).

When it is determined in S4601 that the reserved icon notice flag is not OFF (is ON) (NO in S4601), the reserved icon notice is currently being executed, and this process is terminated without performing the process from S4602 onwards. Therefore, in this embodiment, during execution of the reserved icon notice, a reserved icon notice targeting a newly stored (additionally stored) special reserved (later special reserved) is not executed. In other words, during execution of the reserved icon notice, execution of a new reserved icon notice (some new notice performance) is restricted. Therefore, two or more performance holds of the notice display mode are not displayed in the performance hold display area. This prevents overlapping of reserved icon notices, attracts the player's interest in the variable play corresponding to the reserved icon notice being executed (pre-notification target reserve), and makes it possible for the player to have expectations for the variable play. The performance control microcomputer 91 that controls the reserved icon notice flag and the ON/OFF of the reserved icon notice flag is also called the "pre-notification performance restriction means" or "second restriction means".

In addition, the reserved icon notice flag may not be set, and a reserved icon notice for a subsequent special reserved pattern may be executed while a reserved icon notice is being executed. In other words, the reserved performance display area may be configured to display two or more reserved performances in the notice display mode.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S4601 that the reserved icon notice flag is OFF (YES in S4601), a determination (lottery) is made as to whether or not to execute the reserved icon notice (S4602). In this embodiment, when the game state is a low probability low base state (presentation mode A or B), that is, when it is a low base state in which the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable game) is mainly executed, the reserved icon notice by the first performance hold 9a (also called the "first reserved icon notice") is configured to be executable. Also, when the game state is a low probability high base state (presentation mode C) or a high probability high base state (presentation mode D), that is, when it is a high base state in which the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable game) is mainly executed, the reserved icon notice by the second performance hold 9b (also called the "second reserved icon notice") is configured to be executable. In response to this, in S4602, if the current game state is a low base state, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute the first hold icon announcement, and if the current game state is a high base state, a determination is made as to whether or not to execute the second hold icon announcement.

The decision as to whether or not to execute the hold icon notice (also referred to as the "hold icon notice execution decision") can be made, for example, based on a hold icon notice execution decision table (not shown). Specifically, for example, a hold icon notice execution decision random number (for example, "0 to 99") is set as a random number for determining the performance, and one value is randomly obtained from the random number, and the obtained value (random number value for hold icon notice execution decision) is judged based on the hold icon notice execution decision table. The hold icon notice execution decision random number value can be obtained, for example, at the timing when the start ball entry command is received (S4390) or at the timing when the hold icon notice execution decision is made (S4602).

If the result of the judgment in S4602 is that the hold icon notice is not to be executed (NO in S4603), this process ends without performing the processes in S4604 and onwards. If the hold icon notice is to be executed (YES in S4603), the execution pattern of the hold icon notice (also called the "hold icon notice pattern") is set (S4604).

The reserved icon preview pattern defines various conditions for executing the reserved icon preview, such as the display timing when the reserved icon is displayed in the preview display mode, the type of preview display mode, and the number of changes (number of reserved changes). The display timing of the preview display mode (timing of executing the reserved icon preview) can be, for example, when the start ball is scored (when a new reserved icon is displayed with the start ball scored), when the display position of the reserved icon corresponding to the reserved icon to be previewed in the performance reserved display area moves (shifts) in the direction of decreasing the number of reserved icons as the special chart reserved (also called "advance reserved") stored before the reserved icon to be previewed is consumed, when the reserved icon corresponding to the reserved icon to be previewed moves from the performance reserved display area to the variable reserved display area (when it changes to an active reserved icon), etc.

In S4604, if it is determined in the hold icon notice execution judgment (S4602) that the first hold icon notice is to be executed, an execution pattern of the first hold icon notice (also referred to as the "first hold icon notice pattern") is set, and if it is determined that the second hold icon notice is to be executed, an execution pattern of the second hold icon notice (also referred to as the "second hold icon notice pattern") is set. The first hold icon notice pattern and the second hold icon notice pattern are collectively referred to as the "hold icon notice patterns".

The reserved icon preview pattern set in S4604 can be determined (selected) based on, for example, a reserved icon preview pattern determination table (not shown). Specifically, for example, a reserved icon preview pattern determination random number (for example, "0 to 99") is set as a random number for determining the performance, and a value is randomly obtained from the random number, and the obtained value (random number value for determining the reserved icon preview pattern) is judged based on the reserved icon preview pattern determination table to determine (select) a pattern to be executed from a plurality of predetermined reserved icon preview patterns. The random number value for determining the reserved icon preview pattern can be obtained, for example, at the timing when the start ball entry command is received (S4390) or at the timing when the reserved icon preview pattern is determined (S4604).

After the hold icon notification pattern is set in S4064, the hold icon notification flag is turned ON (S4605). Then, a hold icon notification command that instructs execution of a hold icon notification based on the hold icon notification pattern set in S4604 is set in the sub-output buffer (S4606), and this process ends.

When the hold icon preview command set in S4606 is sent to the image control board 100 by the command sending process (S4006), the image control microcontroller 101 reads out image data for the hold icon preview (e.g., performance hold image data) corresponding to the hold icon preview pattern specified based on the received hold icon preview command, i.e., the hold icon preview pattern set in S4604, from the ROM of the image control board 100, and executes the hold icon preview based on the read image data on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (performance hold display area, variable hold display area).

[About the production]
The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is capable of executing reach effects, pseudo consecutive effects, and reserved icon notices, as described above, but is also equipped with other effects that can be executed. Some of these effects are exemplified below.

(Example 1)
This presentation example is one of the preview effects among the multiple preview effects that the pachinko game machine 1 has, and is an example of a preview effect that can be executed over a predetermined number of variable games (a predetermined period) when the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is set (controlled) to a low probability low base state, that is, presentation mode A or B (also called a "predetermined variable mode" or "predetermined mode"). The preview effect related to this presentation example is also called a "special zone effect", and the special zone effect is also called a "specific preview effect" or a "specific effect". In addition, the special zone effect is mainly executed under the control of the performance control microcomputer 91 (sub-control board 90). Therefore, the performance control microcomputer 91 functions as a "specific effect execution means".

In addition, since the special symbol that changes and is displayed in a low probability, low base state (presentation mode A or B) is mainly the first special symbol, the following explanation will be given under the assumption that the special symbol (special symbol reserved) that is the subject of the forecast is the first special symbol (first special symbol reserved).

The special zone performance is a performance (a type of advance notice performance) that foretells that if a reach is achieved during the variable performance (variable display of performance pattern 8) that accompanies the variable display of special patterns during the execution period of the zone performance (also called the "zone period"), SP reach A or pseudo consecutive SP reach B will be confirmed at the time of the achievement.

The special zone presentation can be executed before the start of the variable display based on the special pattern reserve (the variable display that is the subject of the judgment) if, in a pre-judgment of the variable pattern based on the first variable pattern table (see Figure 9A), it is judged that the variable pattern of the special pattern reserve (variable display of a special pattern) that is the subject of the judgment is variable pattern P1, P2, P4 or P5 (specific variable pattern with a variable time of 75,000 ms).

The special zone effects are controlled by the special zone effect process (S5000) shown in FIG. 46, which is executed as a subroutine of the preview effect setting process (S4506) described above. As shown in the figure, the special zone effect process (S5000) first determines whether the preview effect restriction flag and the reserved icon preview flag are OFF (S5001).

As mentioned above, the advance notice performance restriction flag is a flag that is turned ON in S4399 if there is an abnormality in the storage (storage contents) of the performance hold information by S4395. When the advance notice performance restriction flag is ON, the execution of a performance based on the performance hold information (pre-determination result information specified by the start ball entry command) is restricted. Since special zone performance is a type of performance based on performance hold information (variation pattern pre-determination result information), the setting status of the advance notice performance restriction flag is determined (confirmed).

As described above, when the reserved icon announcement is executed (YES in S4603), the reserved icon announcement flag is a flag that is turned ON in S4605, and is ON while the reserved icon announcement is being executed. Therefore, in order to prevent the special zone effect from being executed (started) while the reserved icon announcement is being executed, the setting status of the reserved icon announcement flag is determined (confirmed). In other words, while the reserved icon announcement is being executed, the execution of the special zone effect (some new announcement effect) is restricted (announcement effect restriction means, second restriction means). For this reason, the special zone effect is not executed overlappingly while the reserved icon announcement is being executed. This makes it possible to optimally exert the respective effects of the reserved icon announcement and the special zone effect, without the interest of the reserved icon announcement being hindered by the special zone effect, or the interest of the special zone effect being hindered by the reserved icon announcement.

If it is determined in S5001 that the preview performance restriction flag and the reserved icon preview flag are not OFF (NO in S5001), that is, if at least one of the preview performance restriction flag and the reserved icon preview flag are ON, this process ends without carrying out the processing from S5002 onwards. As a result, while at least one of the preview performance restriction flag and the reserved icon preview flag are ON, the special zone performance will not be executed (started) (the execution of the special zone performance is restricted). Note that both the preview performance restriction flag and the reserved icon preview flag are ON when, for example, an abnormality is found in the memory (memory contents) of the performance pending information caused by a new starting ball that occurs during the execution of the reserved icon preview.

In contrast, if it is determined in S5001 that the preview effect restriction flag and the reserved icon preview flag are OFF (YES in S5001), it is determined whether or not the special zone effect flag is OFF (S5002). The special zone effect flag is a flag that indicates whether or not a special zone effect is being executed (during the zone period), and is turned ON in S5006 described below when a special zone effect is being executed, and is turned OFF based on the end of the variable display based on the special chart reserve (specific variable reserve described below) that triggered the execution of the special zone effect, i.e., the variable display (variable performance) based on the variable pattern P1, P2, P4 or P5.

If it is determined in S5002 that the special zone effect flag is not OFF (is ON) (NO in S5002), since the special zone effect is currently being executed (during the zone period), this process is terminated without performing the processing from S5003 onwards. Therefore, during the execution of the special zone effect, a special zone effect targeting a newly stored (additionally stored) special chart reserve (later special chart reserve) will not be executed. In other words, during the execution of the special zone effect, the execution of a new special zone effect (some new notice effects) is restricted, so that the special zone effect is not executed in duplicate or the execution period of the special zone effect is not extended. This makes it possible to optimally exert the effect of the special zone effect. In addition, during the execution of the special zone effect, the execution of a new reserved icon notice (some new notice effects) may also be restricted. In this way, the special zone effect and the reserved icon notice are not executed in duplicate, so that the effect of the effect can be optimally exerted.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5002 that the special zone effect flag is OFF (YES in S5002), a determination is made as to whether or not to execute (start) a special zone effect (also called a "special zone effect execution determination") (S5003). In this embodiment, the conditions under which the special zone effect execution judgment (S5003) determines that the special zone effect is to be executed (also referred to as "special zone effect execution conditions") are at least three conditions: (1) the number of first special chart reserves (number of reserved balls for special chart 1) is 2 or more, (2) a first special chart reserve (also referred to as "specific change reserve") whose special chart fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern P1, P2, P4 or P5 (specific change pattern) is stored as the first special chart reserve corresponding to the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 "2", "3" or "4", and (3) a first special chart reserve (also referred to as "non-specific change reserve") whose special chart fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern P3, P6 or P7 (non-specific change pattern) is not stored before (before) the specific change reserve.

The determination of whether the above conditions (1) to (3) are met can be made based on the storage contents of the first storage areas 1 to 4 (see FIG. 45) of the performance hold information storage area. Specifically, when performance hold information corresponding to a specific variable hold (also called "specific performance hold information"), that is, information indicating the variable patterns P1, P2, P4, or P5 as the variable pattern advance determination result information, is stored in any of the first storage areas 2 to 4 among the first storage areas 1 to 4, the above conditions (1) and (2) are met. And, for example, when specific performance hold information is stored in the first storage area 4, if performance hold information corresponding to a non-specific variable hold (also called "non-specific performance hold information"), that is, information indicating the variable patterns P3, P6, or P7 as the variable pattern advance determination result information is not stored in any of the first storage areas 1 to 3, the above condition (3) is also met. In this way, if specific performance hold information is stored in the first memory area 4, and no non-specific performance hold information is stored in the first memory areas 1-3, then the special zone performance can be executed (started) based on the specific performance hold information (specific variable hold). Therefore, for example, even if specific performance hold information is stored in the first memory area 4, if non-specific performance hold information is stored in any of the first memory areas 1-3, then the above condition (3) is not met, and the special zone performance cannot be executed. In other words, the presence (storage) of non-specific performance hold information restricts (prohibits) the execution of the special zone performance.

If the execution of a special zone effect is restricted due to the storage of non-specific effect hold information (non-specific variable hold), the restriction on the execution of the special zone effect is lifted when a variable display based on the non-specific variable hold is executed (non-specific variable hold is consumed) and the storage of the non-specific effect hold information (non-specific variable hold) is cleared. In other words, the condition for lifting the restriction on the special zone effect is met when the storage of the non-specific effect hold information (non-specific variable hold) is cleared.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in addition to the above conditions (1) to (3), (4) winning the lottery to execute the special zone effect is set as one of the conditions to execute the special zone effect. Therefore, even if the above conditions (1) to (3) are met, if the lottery to execute the special zone effect is not won, the special zone effect will not be executed.

The special zone performance execution lottery can be performed, for example, based on a special zone performance execution judgment table (not shown). Specifically, a special zone performance execution judgment random number (for example, "0 to 99") is set as a random number for performance determination, and one value is randomly obtained from the random number, and the obtained value (random number value for special zone performance execution judgment) is judged based on the special zone performance execution judgment table. The random number value for special zone performance execution judgment can be obtained, for example, at the timing when the start ball entry command is received (S4390) or at the timing when the special zone performance execution judgment is made (S5003). Note that it is also possible to configure the system so that the special zone performance execution lottery is not performed and the special zone performance can be executed if the above conditions (1) to (3) are met. In addition, the special zone performance execution conditions are not limited to those shown in this embodiment and can be changed as appropriate.

The performance control microcomputer 91, which executes the process of restricting the execution of special zone performance (see condition (3) above) or lifting the restriction based on the special zone performance execution judgment (S5003), functions as a "specific performance restriction means."

If the result of the special zone effect execution determination (S5003) is that a special zone effect is not to be executed (NO in S5004), this process ends without performing the processes in S5005 and onwards, and if a special zone effect is to be executed (YES in S5004), the execution pattern of the special zone effect (also called the "special zone effect pattern") is set (S5005).

The special zone presentation pattern determines the mode of execution of the special zone presentation, and in this embodiment, there are multiple special zone presentation patterns. Specifically, there is a special zone presentation pattern (also called the "first special zone presentation pattern") corresponding to SP reach A (variation patterns P1, P4), a special zone presentation pattern (also called the "second special zone presentation pattern") corresponding to pseudo consecutive SP reach B (variation patterns P2, P5), and a special zone presentation pattern (also called the "third special zone presentation pattern") corresponding to both SP reach A and pseudo consecutive SP reach B (P1, P2, P4, P5).

The first special zone performance pattern can be set when the specific performance pending information that triggers the execution of a special zone performance includes pre-determination result information of the fluctuation pattern P1 or P4, and a special zone performance is executed based on the specific performance pending information (specific fluctuation pending).

The second special zone performance pattern can be set when the specific performance pending information that triggers the execution of a special zone performance includes pre-determination result information of the fluctuation pattern P2 or P5, and a special zone performance is executed based on the specific performance pending information (specific fluctuation pending).

The third special zone performance pattern can be set when the specific performance hold information that triggers the execution of a special zone performance includes pre-determination result information of the fluctuation pattern P1, P2, P4 or P5, and a special zone performance is executed based on the specific performance hold information (specific fluctuation hold).

The special zone presentation pattern set in S5005 can be determined (selected) according to the type of special chart change pattern corresponding to the specific presentation hold information (specific change hold) that triggers the execution of this special zone presentation, that is, the change pattern pre-determination result information (i.e., the change pattern pre-determination result) included in the specific presentation hold information stored in the presentation hold information storage area (e.g., any of the first storage areas 2 to 4). For example, if the specific presentation hold information that triggers the execution of the special zone presentation includes change pattern pre-determination result information of the change pattern P1 or P4, the first special zone presentation pattern or the third special zone presentation pattern can be selected and set, and if it includes change pattern pre-determination result information of the change pattern P2 or P5, the second special zone presentation pattern or the third special zone presentation pattern can be selected and set. The selection can be made, for example, based on a predetermined presentation pattern determination random number and a presentation pattern determination table (by random number lottery), similar to the aforementioned change presentation pattern and advance notice presentation pattern.

After the special zone performance pattern is set in S5005, the special zone performance flag is turned ON (S5006). Then, a special zone performance command that instructs the execution (start) of the special zone performance based on the special zone performance pattern set in S5005 is set in the sub output buffer (S5007), and this processing ends.

When the special zone performance command set in S5007 is sent to the image control board 100 by the command sending process (S4006), the image control microcontroller 101 reads out image data for the special zone performance that corresponds to the special zone performance pattern specified based on the received special zone performance command, i.e., the special zone performance pattern set in S5005, from the ROM of the image control board 100, and executes a special zone performance based on the read image data on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The special zone presentation can be performed, for example, as shown in Figure 47. That is, the special zone presentation based on the first special zone presentation pattern (also referred to as the "first special zone presentation") can be performed in a manner that suggests (predicts) that SP Reach A will be confirmed when a reach is achieved, such as by displaying a caption image 701 containing text (message) such as "SP Reach A when a reach is achieved!" on the display screen 7a, as shown in Figure 47 (A), moving (as if the text is flowing) in a predetermined direction (for example, from the left side of the screen to the right side of the screen).

The special zone presentation based on the second special zone presentation pattern (also referred to as the "second special zone presentation") can be performed in a manner that suggests (predicts) that a pseudo-consecutive SP reach B will be confirmed when a reach is achieved, such as by displaying a caption image 702 containing text (message) such as "A reach is achieved and a pseudo-consecutive SP reach B!" on the display screen 7a, moving (as if the text is flowing) in a predetermined direction (for example, from the left side of the screen to the right side of the screen), as shown in FIG. 47(B).

The special zone presentation based on the third special zone presentation pattern (also referred to as the "third special zone presentation") can be performed in a manner that suggests (predicts) that an SP reach A or pseudo consecutive SP reach B will be confirmed when a reach is achieved, for example by displaying a caption image 703 containing text (message) such as "If a reach is achieved, SP reach A or pseudo consecutive SP reach B!" on the display screen 7a, moving (as if the text is flowing) in a predetermined direction (for example, from the left side of the screen to the right side of the screen), as shown in FIG. 47(C).

In the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, such a special zone presentation is executed (started) before the start of the variation display based on the specific variation reservation, and is then performed until a reach is established in the variation display based on the specific variation reservation. Then, if the variation pattern of the variation display based on the specific variation reservation is variation pattern P1 or P2 (i.e., a jackpot variation), the special zone presentation is followed by a transition to a jackpot game (special game state). On the other hand, if the variation pattern of the variation display based on the specific variation reservation is variation pattern P4 or P5 (i.e., a miss variation), the presentation mode returns with the variation display, and a transition is made to the next or subsequent variation game. Such a special zone presentation makes it possible to effectively stimulate the player's expectations for a high-expectation reach presentation or a jackpot. It also makes it possible to perform presentations for jackpot variations and presentations for miss variations in an optimal manner.

In this example, the above conditions (1) to (4) are set as the conditions for executing the special zone effect, but condition (2) (a specific variable reserve must be stored) may be omitted. In this case, if the above conditions (1), (2), and (4) are met, the special zone effect will be executed (started). However, since the special zone effect is executed under circumstances in which a specific variable reserve is not stored, a reach will not be established in the variable display based on the special chart reserve stored at the start of the special zone effect (the point at which the special zone effect execution conditions are established) and SP reach A or pseudo consecutive SP reach B will not be executed. In other words, the special zone effect that is executed (started) by satisfying the above conditions (1), (2), and (4) will be a false special zone effect.

The fake special zone performance can be terminated, for example, when the first special chart reserve (non-specific fluctuation reserve) that becomes fluctuation pattern P3, P6 or P7 (non-specific fluctuation pattern) is stored, or when the fluctuation display based on the non-specific fluctuation reserve starts. In other words, it can be configured so that the special zone performance ends before the fluctuation display based on the non-specific fluctuation reserve starts. In such cases, too, the existence (storage) of the non-specific fluctuation reserve limits the execution of the special zone performance. This is because the existence of the non-specific fluctuation reserve forcibly terminates the special zone performance (fake).

By configuring the special zone performance (fake) to end before the start of the display of changes based on the non-specific change reserve, it is possible to foster a sense of expectation and trust in the special zone performance when it is executed without compromising the playability of the special zone performance, i.e., the confirmation of SP Reach A or pseudo consecutive SP Reach B when a reach is reached. It is also possible to increase the opportunities for execution of special zone performances, including fakes.

The conditions for ending the fake special zone effect are not limited to those shown in this effect example, and may be terminated, for example, when a predetermined number of variable plays (missing variables) have been performed before a new non-specific variable reserve is stored.

(Example 2)
This performance example is an example of a preview performance that can be executed in conjunction with the special zone performance described in performance example 1 above. Specifically, it is a performance (also called a "pre-preview performance") that warns that a special zone performance will be executed (entering the zone period) before the special zone performance is executed (started). The pre-preview performance is executed mainly under the control of the performance control microcomputer 91 (sub-control board 90). Therefore, the performance control microcomputer 91 functions as a "pre-preview performance execution means."

As mentioned above, there are three types of special zone effects: a first special zone effect (see FIG. 47(A)), a second special zone effect (see FIG. 47(B)), and a third special zone effect (see FIG. 47(C)). In response to this, this effect example provides a first special zone stimulation effect that is executed before the execution of the first special zone effect, a second special zone stimulation effect that is executed before the execution of the second special zone effect, and a third special zone stimulation effect that is executed before the execution of the third special zone effect.

The first special zone teasing effect is executed when the first special zone effect pattern is set in S5005 (see FIG. 46). That is, when the special zone effect command set in S5007 in response to the first special zone effect pattern being set in S5005 is sent from the sub-control board 90 (effect control microcomputer 91) to the image control board 100, the image control microcomputer 101 reads image data for the first special zone teasing effect and image data for the first special zone effect from the ROM of the image control board 100, and executes the first special zone teasing effect and the first special zone effect based on the read image data on the display screen 7a in order starting with the first special zone teasing effect.

The first special zone promotion effect can be performed, for example, by displaying on the display screen 7a a performance image (sliding door image) 710 that shows the entire screen being closed by a sliding door, as shown in FIG. 48(A). In this case, after the first special zone promotion effect shown in FIG. 48(A) is performed, the first special zone effect shown in FIG. 47(A) is executed.

The second special zone stimulation performance is executed when the second special zone performance pattern is set in S5005 described above. That is, when the special zone performance command set in S5007 in response to the second special zone performance pattern being set in S5005 is sent from the sub-control board 90 (performance control microcomputer 91) to the image control board 100, the image control microcomputer 101 reads image data for the second special zone stimulation performance and image data for the second special zone performance from the ROM of the image control board 100, and executes the second special zone stimulation performance and the second special zone performance based on the read image data on the display screen 7a in order starting with the second special zone stimulation performance.

The second special zone stimulation effect can be performed, for example, by displaying on the display screen 7a a performance image (shutter image) 711 that shows the entire screen being closed by a shutter, as shown in FIG. 48(B). In this case, after the second special zone stimulation effect shown in FIG. 48(B) is performed, the second special zone effect shown in FIG. 47(B) is executed.

The third special zone stimulation performance is executed when the third special zone performance pattern is set in S5005 described above. That is, when the special zone performance command set in S5007 in response to the setting of the third special zone performance pattern in S5005 is sent from the sub-control board 90 (performance control microcomputer 91) to the image control board 100, the image control microcomputer 101 reads image data for the third special zone stimulation performance and image data for the third special zone performance from the ROM of the image control board 100, and executes the third special zone stimulation performance and the third special zone performance based on the read image data on the display screen 7a in order starting with the third special zone stimulation performance.

The third special zone stimulation effect can be performed, for example, by displaying an effect image (blackout image) 712 showing the entire screen going dark on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 48(C). In this case, after the third special zone stimulation effect shown in FIG. 48(C) is performed, the third special zone effect shown in FIG. 47(C) is executed.

In the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, such a special zone provocation performance is executed before the execution (start) of the special zone performance, and the special zone performance is executed (started) after the execution of the special zone provocation performance. That is, among the first special zone provocation performance, the second special zone provocation performance, and the third special zone provocation performance (multiple pre-notification performances), when the first special zone provocation performance (first pre-notification performance) is executed, the first special zone performance (first pre-notification performance) is executed after the execution of the first special zone provocation performance, when the second special zone provocation performance (second pre-notification performance) is executed, the second special zone performance (second pre-notification performance) is executed after the execution of the second special zone provocation performance, and when the third special zone provocation performance (third pre-notification performance) is executed, the third special zone performance (third pre-notification performance) is executed after the execution of the third special zone provocation performance. For this reason, the special zone teasing effect (pre-notice effect) is an effect that suggests in advance that a special zone effect (notice effect) will be executed, and through this special zone teasing effect, it is possible to suggest the type of special zone effect that will be executed. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in the special zone effect.

(Example 3)
This performance example is an example of a preview performance (preview performance) that can be executed based on specific performance hold information (specific variable hold) when the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is set (controlled) to a low probability low base state, that is, performance mode A or B (predetermined variable mode), similar to the special zone performance related to the above-mentioned performance example 1. Note that, in the following, explanations of points common to the explanation related to the above-mentioned performance example 1 will be omitted.

The preview performance in this performance example is a performance that suggests (announces) the storage and consumption of a special reserved pattern when SP Reach A is executed, or suggests (announces) the storage and consumption of a special reserved pattern when pseudo-consecutive SP Reach B is executed. This performance (the preview performance in performance example 3) is also called a "standby performance" or "waiting performance", and the standby performance (waiting performance) is also called a "specific preview performance" or "specific performance". In other words, the standby performance is also one aspect of a "specific preview performance" or "specific performance", just like the special zone performance in performance example 1 described above.

The standby performance, like the special zone performance (performance example 1) described above, can be executed when the pre-determination of the change pattern based on the first change pattern table (see FIG. 9A) determines that the change pattern of the special reserved pattern (change display of a special pattern) that is the subject of the determination is change pattern P1, P2, P4, or P5 (specific change pattern with a change time of 75,000 ms), and can be executed from before the start of the change display based on the special reserved pattern (the change display that is the subject of the determination) until a specified time after the start (a specified time during the change display). In addition, the standby performance can be executed when the special zone performance described above is not being executed. In other words, when the special zone performance is being executed (during the zone period), the execution of the standby performance (some of the new preview performances) is restricted (the standby performance cannot be executed).

The aforementioned special zone effects can be executed when the standby effects are not being executed, and when the standby effects are being executed, the execution of special zone effects (some of the new preview effects) is restricted (special zone effects cannot be executed).

The standby effect is controlled by the standby effect process (S5500) shown in FIG. 49, which is executed as a subroutine of the preview effect setting process (S4506) described above. Note that the standby effect process (S5500) is a process that is performed when the special zone effect described above is not being executed (when the special zone effect flag described above is OFF), and the special zone effect process (S5000) is a process that is performed when the standby effect is not being executed (when the standby effect described below is OFF).

As shown in FIG. 49, the processing contents of the standby effect processing (S5500) are basically the same as the processing contents of the special zone effect processing (S5000) described above (see FIG. 46). That is, in the standby effect processing (S5500), it is first determined whether the advance notice effect restriction flag and the reserved icon advance notice flag are OFF (S5501). The advance notice effect restriction flag and the reserved icon advance notice flag are as described above.

If it is determined in S5501 that the preview performance restriction flag and the reserved icon preview flag are not OFF (NO in S5501), i.e., if at least one of the preview performance restriction flag and the reserved icon preview flag are ON, this process ends without carrying out the processing from S5502 onwards. As a result, while at least one of the preview performance restriction flag and the reserved icon preview flag is ON, a standby performance will not be executed (started). For this reason, for example, while a reserved icon preview is being executed, the execution of a standby performance (some new preview performances) is restricted (preview performance restriction means, second restriction means).

In contrast, if it is determined in S5501 that the preview performance restriction flag and the reserved icon preview flag are OFF (YES in S5501), it is determined whether or not the standby performance flag is OFF (S5502). The standby performance flag is a flag that indicates whether or not a standby performance is being executed, and is turned ON in S5506 described below when a standby performance is being executed, and is turned OFF based on the end of the variable display based on the special chart reserve (specific variable reserve) that triggered the execution of the standby performance, i.e., the variable display (variable performance) based on the variable pattern P1, P2, P4 or P5.

If it is determined in S5502 that the standby effect flag is not OFF (is ON) (NO in S5502), the standby effect is currently being executed, and this process is terminated without performing the processes in S5503 and onwards. Therefore, while the standby effect is being executed, a standby effect targeting a newly stored (additionally stored) special reserved (later special reserved) will not be executed. In other words, while the standby effect is being executed, the execution of a new standby effect (some new preview effects) is restricted. Therefore, the standby effect will not be executed in duplicate or the execution period of the standby effect will not be extended. This makes it possible to optimally exert the effect of the standby effect. Note that while the standby effect is being executed, the execution of a new reserved icon preview (some new preview effects) may also be restricted. In this way, the standby effect and the reserved icon preview will not be executed in duplicate, making it possible to optimally exert the effect of the effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in S5502 that the standby performance flag is OFF (YES in S5502), a determination is made as to whether or not to execute (start) the standby performance (also called a "standby performance execution determination") (S5503). In this embodiment, the conditions under which the standby performance execution judgment (S5503) determines that the standby performance is to be executed (also referred to as "standby performance execution conditions") include at least four conditions: (1) the number of memories of the first special chart reserve (number of reserved balls for special chart 1) is 2 or more; (2) the first special chart reserve (specific change reserve) whose special chart change pattern is change pattern P1, P2, P4 or P5 (specific change pattern) is stored as the first special chart reserve corresponding to the number of reserved balls for special chart 1 "1", "2", "3" or "4"; (3) the first special chart reserve (non-specific change reserve) whose special chart change pattern is change pattern P3, P6 or P7 (non-specific change pattern) is not stored before (before) the specific change reserve; and (4) the standby performance execution lottery is won. Note that the standby performance execution lottery may not be performed, and the standby performance may be executed if the above conditions (1) to (3) are satisfied. Additionally, the standby performance execution conditions are not limited to those shown in this example and can be changed as appropriate.

If the result of the standby performance execution determination (S5503) is that the standby performance is not to be executed (NO at S5504), this process ends without performing the processes from S5505 onwards. If the standby performance is to be executed (YES at S5504), the execution pattern of the standby performance (also called the "standby performance pattern") is set (S5505).

The standby presentation pattern determines the manner in which the standby presentation is executed, and in this embodiment, there are multiple standby presentation patterns. Specifically, there is a standby presentation pattern (also called the "first standby presentation pattern") corresponding to SP reach A (variation patterns P1, P4), and a standby presentation pattern (also called the "second standby presentation pattern") corresponding to pseudo consecutive SP reach B (variation patterns P2, P5).

The first standby performance pattern can be set when the specific performance pending information that triggers the execution of the standby performance includes pre-determination result information of the fluctuation pattern P1 or P4, and the standby performance is executed based on the specific performance pending information (specific fluctuation pending).

The second standby performance pattern can be set when the specific performance pending information that triggers the execution of the standby performance includes pre-determination result information of the fluctuation pattern P2 or P5, and the standby performance is executed based on the specific performance pending information (specific fluctuation pending).

The standby performance pattern set in S5505 can be determined (selected) according to the type of special chart change pattern corresponding to the specific performance hold information (specific change hold) that triggers the execution of this standby performance, that is, the change pattern pre-determination result information (i.e., the change pattern pre-determination result) included in the specific performance hold information stored in the performance hold information storage area (e.g., any of the first storage areas 1 to 4). For example, if the specific performance hold information that triggers the execution of the standby performance includes change pattern pre-determination result information of change pattern P1 or P4, the first standby performance pattern can be selected and set, and if it includes change pattern pre-determination result information of change pattern P2 or P5, the second standby performance pattern can be selected and set. The selection can be made, for example, based on a predetermined random number for determining the performance pattern and a performance pattern determination table (by random number lottery), just like the aforementioned change performance pattern and advance notice performance pattern.

Once the standby performance pattern is set in S5505, the standby performance flag is turned ON (S5506). Then, a standby performance command that instructs the execution (start) of the standby performance based on the standby performance pattern set in S5505 is set in the sub output buffer (S5507), and this process ends.

When the standby performance command set in S5507 is sent to the image control board 100 by the command sending process (S4006), the image control microcontroller 101 reads image data for the standby performance that corresponds to the standby performance pattern specified based on the received standby performance command, i.e., the standby performance pattern set in S5505, from the ROM of the image control board 100, and executes a standby performance based on the read image data on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

The standby performance can be performed, for example, as shown in FIG. 50. That is, the standby performance based on the first standby performance pattern (also called the "first standby performance") is performed, for example, as shown in FIG. 50 (A1), by displaying a standby image 721 including the letters "SPA" at a predetermined position (also called the "standby position") near the performance hold display area (first performance hold display area 9c) on the display screen 7a, and then, as shown in FIG. 50 (A2), at the timing when the performance hold (hold icon) corresponding to the special chart hold (specific variable hold) moves to the variable hold display area 9e and is displayed as an active hold icon with the start of the variable display based on the special chart hold (specific variable hold) that triggered the execution of the standby performance, the standby image 721 is moved (moved and displayed) from the standby position to above the active hold icon (variable hold display area 9e). By displaying the standby image 721 at the standby position, it is determined that the SP reach A will be executed (occur) with the variable display based on one of the special chart holds stored (existing) at that time.

The standby performance based on the second standby performance pattern (also called the "second standby performance") can be performed, for example, as shown in FIG. 50 (B1), by displaying a standby image 722 containing the character "doubt" at a predetermined standby position on the display screen 7a, and then, as shown in FIG. 50 (B2), at the timing when the performance hold (hold icon) corresponding to the special chart hold moves to the hold-on-variation display area 9e and is displayed as an active hold icon in response to the start of the variable display based on the special chart hold (specific variable hold) that triggered the execution of the standby performance, the standby image 722 is moved (displayed moving) from the standby position to above the active hold icon (variable hold display area 9e). By displaying the standby image 722 at the standby position, it is determined that a pseudo consecutive SP reach B will be executed (occur) in the variable display based on one of the special chart holds stored (existing) at that time.

In FIG. 50, for ease of explanation, the first effect hold 9c corresponding to the specific variable hold is shown in black, but in reality, at least until the variable display based on the specific variable hold starts (the specific variable hold is consumed), the effect hold corresponding to the specific variable hold and other effect holds are displayed in the same display mode, so that the player cannot distinguish which of the effect holds displayed in the effect hold display area corresponds to the specific variable hold. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in which special chart hold (effect hold) is the target (trigger) of the standby effect, etc.

Also, as shown in FIG. 50, in this example, the word "Waiting" included in the standby images 721, 722 displayed at the standby position changes to "Activated" in the standby images 721, 722 displayed above the active hold icon (variable hold display area 9e), but this display mode can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, in this example, the standby position is set above the hold display area, but for example, the standby position can be set in association with a hold that corresponds to a special hold (specific variable hold) that triggers the execution of a standby performance, and the location where the standby position is set can be changed as appropriate.

In the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, such a standby performance (pre-reading performance) is executed (started) before the start of the variable display based on the specific variable reserve, and is then performed until the SP reach A or pseudo consecutive SP reach B occurs in the variable display based on the specific variable reserve. Then, if the variable display pattern based on the specific variable reserve is the variable pattern P1 or P2 (i.e., a jackpot variable), the standby performance is followed by a transition to a jackpot game (special game state). On the other hand, if the variable display pattern based on the specific variable reserve is the variable pattern P4 or P5 (i.e., a miss variable), the variable display ends after the standby performance, and the transition is made to the next or subsequent variable game. Such a standby performance draws the player's attention to the memory or consumption of the special chart reserve that is the trigger for the execution of the SP reach A or pseudo consecutive performance, and it becomes possible to effectively stimulate the player's expectations for a high expectation performance (SP reach A or pseudo consecutive SP reach B) or a jackpot. It also becomes possible to perform performances for jackpot fluctuations and performances for miss fluctuations in an appropriate manner.

Regarding the standby effects, there are no so-called "fake" effects. This is to avoid compromising the nature (gameplay) of the standby effects, which definitively suggest (announce) the execution of an effect that corresponds to the fluctuation pattern that is the subject of the pending read-ahead.

(Example 4)
This example of the performance is an example of a performance (also called "in-fluctuating performance") that can be executed during the variable display of the performance pattern 8 when the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is set (controlled) to a low probability low base state (performance mode A or B). The variable performance refers to various performances that can be executed from the start to the end of the variable display (variable game), such as reach performance, pseudo consecutive performance, and performance using the performance button 63 (operation means) (also called "button performance" or "operation performance"). According to the variable performance pattern set in the above-mentioned S4505, one or more variable performances are executed at a predetermined execution time during one variable display. In other words, when a variable performance is executed during one variable display, it is possible to execute at least a part of the multiple variable performances.

The performance during fluctuation is mainly executed under the control of the performance control microcomputer 91 (sub-control board 90). Therefore, the performance control microcomputer 91 functions as a "performance execution means during fluctuation." The performance during fluctuation may include a performance (preview performance) that is executed based on the preview performance pattern set in the aforementioned S4506.

As described above, when the performance control microcomputer 91 (sub-control board 90) receives a command specifying the variation pattern P1 or P4 (predetermined variation pattern) as a variation pattern specification command from the game control microcomputer 81 (main control board 80), a variation presentation pattern (also called the "SP reach A variation presentation pattern") including SP reach A (any of the first to third SP reach A) is set in S4505, and when the variation display (variation presentation) of the presentation pattern 8 starts based on the variation presentation pattern, the SP reach A (variation presentation) is executed during the variation display. The first to third SP reach A are collectively called the SP reach A. In the SP reach A, when the presentation approaches the end, a presentation (also called the "win/lose branch presentation") is executed that suggests whether the result of the variation display (variation presentation) is likely to be a jackpot or not (or whether it is a jackpot or a miss), and this presentation example is an example of the win/lose branch presentation. In other words, the win/lose branching effect is a type of effect during fluctuation.

In the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, multiple performance patterns of the winning/losing branching performance (also called "winning/losing branching performance patterns") are provided, and the type of the winning/losing branching performance that can be executed (the winning/losing branching performance pattern) is changed (changed) based on the establishment of a predetermined change condition. Specifically, two types of winning/losing branching performance patterns are provided: a no-operation pattern that does not involve the operation of the performance button 63, and an operation pattern that involves the operation of the performance button 63. When the SP Reach A variable performance pattern is set in S4505, the no-operation pattern or the operation pattern is set as the winning/losing branching performance pattern. And, the no-operation pattern is set (executable) by default (initial setting), and the settable (executable) winning/losing branching performance pattern is changed to the operation pattern or the no-operation pattern depending on the number of times the variable game is executed (the number of times it is changed). In other words, when a predetermined change condition is established in a game state (variable game state) in which the variable game is executable, the winning/losing branching performance that can be executed during the variable display is changed. This change is performed under the control of the performance control microcomputer 91 (sub-control board 90). Therefore, the performance control microcomputer 91 functions as a "performance change means during fluctuation."

The number of fluctuations can be counted, for example, by providing a fluctuation counter (fluctuation counting means) in the RAM of the sub-control board 90 and updating the count value of the fluctuation counter based on receipt of a fluctuation start command or a fluctuation stop command from the main control board 80. The object of the counting can be the number of fluctuations during the period from when the power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on to when it is turned off (one day's business hours), the total number of fluctuations since the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed in the gaming hall, or the number of fluctuations between the previous big win and the next big win (between wins).

In this embodiment, the change condition for the presentation that can be executed during the variable display (in this example, the win/lose branch presentation) is the number of times of variation, but the change condition may be a condition other than the number of times of variation, such as the number of presentation points (number of acquired points) awarded to the player during the progress of the variable play reaching a predetermined number, or the number (type) of items awarded to the player during the progress of the variable play reaching a predetermined number.

When the performance control microcomputer 91 receives a fluctuation start command from the main control board 80 (YES in S4401), it performs the win/lose branch flag monitoring process (S6000) shown in FIG. 51 prior to the aforementioned fluctuation performance start process (S4402). As shown in the figure, in the win/lose branch flag monitoring process (S6000), first, the count value of the fluctuation number counter is checked (S6001). In other words, the number of fluctuations at the start of the fluctuation is checked.

In this example, when the number of variations between wins is "0-299", a no-operation pattern can be set, when it is "300-599", a no-operation pattern can be set, when it is "600-999", and when it is "1000 or more (1000 or more)", a pattern with operation can be set. For this reason, S6001 checks whether the count value of the variation number counter at the start of the variation is a first predetermined value (e.g., "300" or "1000") corresponding to the number of variations that will be the timing for changing from a no-operation pattern to a pattern with operation, or a second predetermined value (e.g., "600") corresponding to the number of variations that will be the timing for changing from a pattern with operation to a no-operation pattern.

As a result, if the count value of the fluctuation count counter is the first predetermined value (YES in S6002), the win/loss branch operation flag is turned ON (S6003), and this process ends. The win/loss branch operation flag is a flag for specifying whether the settable win/loss branch presentation pattern is a no-operation pattern or an operation pattern, and is referenced when setting the SP Reach A fluctuation presentation pattern in S4505. If the win/loss branch operation flag is OFF, the win/loss branch presentation pattern is a no-operation pattern, and if the win/loss branch operation flag is ON, the win/loss branch presentation pattern is a operation pattern.

In contrast, if the count value of the fluctuation counter is not the first predetermined value but the second predetermined value (NO in S6002, YES in S6004), the win/lose branch operation flag is turned OFF (S6005), and this process ends. Also, if the count value of the fluctuation counter is not the first predetermined value but the second predetermined value (NO in S6002, NO in S6004), this process ends without performing the processes of S6003 and S6005.

In S4505, when the SP Reach A variable presentation pattern is set, the win/loss branch presentation pattern of the SP Reach A is set to a no-operation pattern or an operation pattern depending on the setting status of the win/loss branch operation flag, which is controlled to be ON/OFF by the win/loss branch flag monitoring process (S6000).

In addition, in this performance example, a first operation pattern in which the first performance button 63a is operated and a second operation pattern in which the second performance button 63b is operated are provided as operation patterns, and when an operation pattern is set, either the first operation pattern or the second operation pattern is selected and set.

The win/lose branching effect according to the first operation pattern is configured so that, when the timing to execute the win/lose branching effect arrives, as shown in FIG. 52(A), a presentation image (first operation prompting image) 730 prompting the user to operate the first presentation button 63a is displayed on the display screen 7a, and when the first presentation button 63a is operated (e.g., pressed once) while the presentation image 730 is displayed (the operation acceptance period), a presentation image (not shown) indicating whether the result of the variable display (variable presentation) is likely to be a jackpot or unlikely to be a jackpot (or whether it is a jackpot or a miss) is displayed on the display screen 7a (i.e., the win/lose branching effect is executed).

The win/lose branching effect according to the second operation pattern is configured so that, when the timing to execute the win/lose branching effect arrives, as shown in FIG. 52 (B), a presentation image (second operation prompting image) 731 prompting the user to operate the second presentation button 63b is displayed on the display screen 7a, and when the second presentation button 63b is operated (e.g., pulled) while the presentation image 731 is displayed (the operation acceptance period), a presentation image (not shown) indicating whether the result of the variable display (variable presentation) is likely to be a jackpot or unlikely to be a jackpot (or whether it is a jackpot or a miss) is displayed on the display screen 7a (i.e., the win/lose branching effect is executed).

When the winning/losing branching presentation pattern is set as a pattern with operation, whether to set the first or second operation pattern as the pattern with operation can be determined (selected) based on, for example, an operation pattern selection table (not shown). Specifically, for example, a random number for determining an operation pattern (for example, "0 to 99") is set as a random number for determining a presentation, and one value is randomly obtained from the random number, and the obtained value (random number value for determining an operation pattern) is judged based on the operation pattern selection table, thereby determining (selecting) the operation pattern to be set as the pattern with operation.

The operation pattern selection table can be configured so that the selection rate (execution rate) of the first operation pattern and the second operation pattern differs depending on whether the special symbol fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation performance including the SP Reach A is a jackpot fluctuation pattern or a miss fluctuation pattern, that is, whether the result of the special symbol hit/miss judgment is a jackpot or a miss. For example, the second operation pattern can be configured to be more likely to be selected than the first operation pattern in the case of a jackpot, and the first operation pattern can be configured to be more likely to be selected than the first operation pattern in the case of a miss. In this case, for the player, the display of performance image 731 (see FIG. 52(B)) at the timing of the hit/miss branch performance increases the player's sense of expectation for a jackpot compared to the display of performance image 730 (see FIG. 52(A)).

If the winning/losing branching effect pattern is a no-operation pattern, when the timing for the winning/losing branching effect arrives, the winning/losing branching effect is executed without displaying effect image 730 or effect image 731.

In the pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment, the above-mentioned win/loss branching presentation is executed at the end of the variable presentation based on the SP Reach A variable presentation pattern (at the end of the SP Reach presentation). Then, when a predetermined change condition based on the number of times the variable game is executed (number of variations) is met, the win/loss branching presentation (win/loss branching presentation pattern) that can be executed during the variable display is changed. This makes it possible to vary the presentation (variable presentation, etc.) executed during the variable display. This makes it possible to diversify the win/loss branching presentation, making it less likely for players to become bored.

The pachinko game machine 1 of this embodiment described above is equipped with at least a special zone effect, a special zone teasing effect, a standby effect, and a win/lose branching effect, and is configured to perform each of these effects appropriately. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In the above-mentioned embodiment, examples of effects that can be executed in a variable game state, such as a hold icon announcement, a special zone effect, and a standby effect, were given as examples of effects based on the results of a pre-determination (pre-determination result information), but it is possible to execute effects based on the results of a pre-determination not only in a variable game state but also in a special game state.

Here, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the presentation based on the results of the pre-determination executed in the variable play state is executed based on the results of the pre-determination based on the starting ball (S317, S322), and in the pre-determination based on the starting ball, a pre-determination of whether or not there is a win, a pre-determination of the type of jackpot, and a pre-determination of the variation pattern are executed. Therefore, when executing a presentation based on the results of the pre-determination in the variable play state, it is possible to execute a presentation based on the results of the pre-determination based on at least one of the pre-determination results of whether or not there is a win, the pre-determination result of the type of jackpot, and the pre-determination result of the variation pattern. Note that the above-mentioned special zone presentation (presentation example 1) and standby presentation (presentation example 3) are executed based on the pre-determination result of the variation pattern.

In contrast, when a performance based on the results of a pre-determination is executed in a special game state, it may be executed based on the results of a pre-determination of whether or not the game will win, and may or may not be executed based on the results of a pre-determination of the type of jackpot or the results of a pre-determination of the variation pattern. This is because the type of game state in which the variable game can be executed (probability change state, time-saving state, high frequency state, etc.) may change before and after the special game state (before and after the start and end of the jackpot game). In particular, since it is common for the type, number, and content of the variation patterns to differ depending on the game state, when a performance based on the results of a pre-determination of the variation pattern is executed in a special game state (opening period, round game, ending period, etc.), there is a possibility that inconsistency will occur between the variation pattern that is actually selected (determined) in the variable game state after the special game state. For this reason, when a performance based on the results of a pre-determination is executed in a special game state, it is configured to be executed based on at least the results of a pre-determination of whether or not the game will win. In this way, concerns about inconsistency in the performance can be eliminated as much as possible. In other words, in the variable game state, the presentation based on the results of the pre-determination is executed based on the results of the pre-determination of the variable pattern (e.g., presentation examples 1 and 3), and in the special game state, the presentation based on the results of the pre-determination is executed based on the results of the pre-determination of whether or not the game is a win/lose, making it possible to optimally execute the presentation based on the results of the pre-determination.

In addition, when the game state is the same (unchanged) between the variable game state before the start of the special game state and the variable game state after the special game state ends (for example, during a consecutive win period when a high probability high base state continues), it is possible to execute a presentation based on the results of a pre-determination based on at least one of the pre-determination results of a win or loss, the pre-determination result of the type of jackpot, and the pre-determination result of the variation pattern, without changing the type (content) of the pre-determination between the variable game state and the special game state. In other words, for example, in both the variable game state and the special game state, it is possible to execute a presentation based on the results of a pre-determination based on the pre-determination result of the variation pattern. This also makes it possible to execute a presentation based on the results of a pre-determination.

In the above-mentioned embodiment, the win/lose branching effect (win/lose branching effect pattern) was changed based on the establishment of a specified change condition, but the during-change effect that is the subject of the change is not limited to the win/lose branching effect, and it is possible for it to be a during-change effect other than the win/lose branching effect. For example, there is no particular restriction on the type (content) of the during-change effect that is the subject of the change, as long as it is an effect that can be executed during the change display and is provided in multiple types (multiple patterns), such as a reach effect (reach effect pattern), pseudo consecutive effect (pseudo consecutive effect pattern), background effect (background effect pattern), preview effect (preview effect pattern), etc.

In the above embodiment, the latest acquired random number value (acquired information) stored in the special chart reserved memory unit is read out for the pre-judgment based on the starting ball entry, and the read acquired random number value (acquired information) is judged (pre-judgment), but the method of pre-judgment is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the special chart reserved memory unit, an area (acquired information storage means) for storing the acquired information to be the subject of the pre-judgment (i.e., the acquired information acquired based on the starting ball entry) may be provided in the RAM of the main control unit 80 or the sub-control unit 90, and the acquired information stored in this storage area (pre-judgment storage unit) may be judged (pre-judgment). In this case, it is also possible to erase the acquired information used for the pre-judgment (acquired information stored in a different storage area) by storing the result of the pre-judgment in the RAM of the main control unit 80 or the sub-control unit 90.

In the above embodiment, the control process is such that the second special chart reservation is consumed in priority over the first special chart reservation, i.e., the control process is a so-called special chart 2 priority consumption control process. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the control process may be such that the first special chart reservation is consumed in priority over the second special chart reservation, i.e., the control process is a so-called special chart 1 priority consumption control process. Also, without setting a priority order between the consumption of the first special chart reservation and the consumption of the second special chart reservation, the control process may be such that the first special chart reservation and the second special chart reservation are consumed in order of the oldest stored, i.e., the control process is a so-called ball entry order (storage order) consumption control process. Also, the control process may be such that the consumption of the first special chart reservation and the consumption of the second special chart reservation can be executed in parallel.

In the above embodiment, the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine of the type that determines whether to activate the probability fluctuation function based on the type of the jackpot pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the present invention can be applied to a pachinko game machine of the type that has a specific area (V area) as a probability variable activation area in the large prize entrance (V attacker) and determines whether to activate the probability fluctuation function based on whether the game ball passes through the specific area (V passing) during the jackpot game (so-called "V sure machine"). Alternatively, the present invention can be applied to a pachinko game machine of the type that has a specific area (V area) in the large prize entrance that can be entered when the result of the special pattern hit/miss judgment is a small hit, and when the game ball that entered the large prize entrance passes through the specific area (V passing) during the small hit game, it becomes a jackpot, and the jackpot game is executed based on the V passing (so-called "1 type 2 type mixed machine"). Furthermore, the present invention can also be applied to pachinko machines that circulate game balls inside the machine (so-called "enclosed game machines").

In the above embodiment, the probability of winning can be set to low (first probability) or high (second probability) by deactivating or activating the probability fluctuation function, but the types (number) of the probability of winning are not limited to this, and three or more types of probabilities may be set, such as a medium probability (third probability) that is higher than the low probability (first probability) and lower than the high probability (second probability). Furthermore, multiple types of probability conditions that define the relationship between low and high probabilities, such as a first low probability and a first high probability (first probability condition), a second low probability and a second high probability (second probability condition), and a third low probability and a third high probability (third probability condition), may be provided, and any of the multiple types of probability conditions may be arbitrarily set (selected) when the gaming machine is turned on, for example.

[others]
Hereinafter, inventions related to the embodiments (examples) disclosed in this specification will be disclosed as reference inventions.

(Reference Invention 1)
Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that performs a variable display of identification information, and when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result, the gaming machine is controlled to enter a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In this type of gaming machine, a pre-determination is performed regarding a variable pattern or a display result related to the variable display of identification information, and a performance is performed based on the result of the pre-determination. The performance based on the result of the pre-determination is generally executed as a performance that foretells (suggests) the future development of the game, such as the possibility that the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result or the possibility of transitioning to a special gaming state (for example, see JP 2015-62623 A).

In recent years, there has been a trend toward an increase in the number and variety of effects installed in each machine. However, as the number and variety of effects increases, the effects can become more complicated and difficult for players to understand, and if the effects are not implemented appropriately, there is a risk that interest in the game will decrease.

This reference invention 1 was made in consideration of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

To solve the above problems, the present invention adopts the following configuration.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 is as follows:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to a special gaming state that is advantageous to a player,
A special game determination means capable of determining whether or not to control to the special game state;
A variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display of identification information;
An acquisition means capable of acquiring variation pattern determination information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A storage means capable of storing the variation pattern determination information acquired by the acquisition means as reserved information;
a variation pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern of the variation display based on a result of the determination by the special game determining means, the number of reserved information stored at the time of starting the variation display, the variation pattern determining information acquired by the acquiring means, and predetermined judgment information when starting the variation display;
A determination means capable of determining a variation pattern of the variation display before the determination by the variation pattern determination means;
A preview performance execution means capable of executing at least a part of the preview performances based on a result of the determination by the determination means;
A variation mode setting means for setting a predetermined variation mode as the variation mode when the variation display is executed,
The predetermined determination information includes determination information corresponding to the specific variation pattern and determination information corresponding to a non-specific variation pattern different from the specific variation pattern,
The determination information corresponding to the specific variation pattern is specific determination information that is the same regardless of the number of reserved information stored when the variation display is started,
The determination information corresponding to the non-specific variation pattern is determination information that differs depending on the number of stored pending information when the variation display is started,
The determination means is capable of determining whether the variation pattern of the variation display becomes the specific variation pattern by determining whether the variation pattern determination information acquired by the acquisition means matches the specific determination information,
The advance notice performance execution means is capable of executing a specific advance notice performance before the start of the display of the variation that is the subject of the judgment when the predetermined variation mode is set and when the judgment means judges that the specific variation pattern will be obtained,
When the predetermined variation mode is set, the execution of the specific preview performance is restricted by storing the reserved information in which the variation pattern of the variation display becomes the non-specific variation pattern,
The gist of the invention is that, during the execution of the preview performance, the execution of at least a part of the new preview performance is restricted.

According to such a gaming machine, in a predetermined variation mode, when the variation pattern of the variation display is determined to be a specific variation pattern in the judgment by the judgment means performed before the determination of the variation pattern by the variation pattern determination means (determination of the variation pattern when the variation display is started), a specific advance notice performance is configured to be executed before the start of the variation display that is the subject of the judgment. The variation pattern determined when the variation display is started is determined based on the result of the determination by the special game determination means, the number of reserved information stored when the variation display is started (the so-called "reserved number"), the variation pattern determination information acquired by the acquisition means, and the predetermined judgment information. The judgment information used in the determination includes judgment information corresponding to the specific variation pattern and judgment information corresponding to a non-specific variation pattern different from the specific variation pattern. The judgment information corresponding to the specific variation pattern is specific judgment information that is the same regardless of the reserved number when the variation display is started, and the judgment information corresponding to the non-specific variation pattern is judgment information that differs depending on the reserved number when the variation display is started. Therefore, in the predetermined variation mode, it is possible to prevent inconsistency between the specific advance notice performance executed for the specific variation pattern and the variation pattern (specific variation pattern) determined at the start of the variation. Additionally, non-specific fluctuation patterns can be adjusted according to the number of reserved items.

Meanwhile, in the specified variation mode, the execution of a specific preview performance is restricted by storing pending information (i.e., variation pattern determination information) in which the variation pattern of the variation display determined by the variation pattern determination means is a non-specific variation pattern, so that it is possible to foster a sense of expectation and trust in the performance (specific preview performance) when the specific preview performance is executed. Also, since the execution of at least some new preview performances is restricted while a preview performance is being executed, it is possible to prevent duplication of performances.

As a result of the above, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 can effectively perform advance notices regarding the changing display of identification information, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 described above,
The results of the determination by the special game determination means include a first result of controlling the game to the special game state and a second result of not controlling the game to the special game state;
The gist of the invention is that the specific variation pattern and the non-specific variation pattern are variation patterns that are determined when the result of the determination by the special game determination means is the second result.

With such a gaming machine, the specific variation pattern and the non-specific variation pattern are variation patterns that are determined when the machine is not controlled to the special gaming state. This makes it possible to appropriately perform advance notice presentations for variation displays that do not trigger control to the special gaming state. This makes it possible to enhance the presentation effect when the machine is not controlled to the special gaming state.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 1-1 or 1-2 described above,
The gist of the invention is that when the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is a predetermined fluctuation pattern, the execution mode of the performance executed by the variable display according to the predetermined fluctuation pattern may be a first execution mode, or a second execution mode different from the first execution mode.

According to such a gaming machine, the presentation executed by the variable display of the identification information according to a predetermined variation pattern may be executed in a first execution mode or in a second execution mode. This makes it possible to diversify the presentation executed by the variable display according to the predetermined variation pattern. This makes it possible to enhance the presentation effect of the variable display.

According to the above-mentioned reference invention 1, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in games.

(Reference Invention 2)
Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that performs a variable display of identification information, and when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result, the gaming machine is controlled to enter a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In this type of gaming machine, a pre-determination is performed regarding a variable pattern or a display result related to the variable display of identification information, and a performance is performed based on the result of the pre-determination. The performance based on the result of the pre-determination is generally executed as a performance that foretells (suggests) the future development of the game, such as the possibility that the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result or the possibility of transitioning to a special gaming state (for example, see JP 2015-62623 A).

In recent years, there has been a trend toward an increase in the number and variety of effects installed in each machine. However, as the number and variety of effects increases, the effects can become more complicated and difficult for players to understand, and if the effects are not implemented appropriately, there is a risk that interest in the game will decrease.

The present reference invention 2 was made in consideration of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

To solve the above problems, the present reference invention 2 adopts the following configuration.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 is as follows:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to a special gaming state that is advantageous to a player,
A special game determination means capable of determining whether or not to control to the special game state;
A variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display of identification information;
An acquisition means capable of acquiring variation pattern determination information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A storage means capable of storing the variation pattern determination information acquired by the acquisition means as reserved information;
a variation pattern determination means for determining a variation pattern of the variation display based on a result of the determination by the special game determination means, the number of reserved information stored when the variation display is started, the variation pattern determination information acquired by the acquisition means, and predetermined judgment information when the variation display is started;
A determination means capable of determining a variation pattern of the variation display before the determination by the variation pattern determination means;
a performance execution means for executing a predetermined performance based on a result of the determination by the determination means;
A variation mode setting means for setting a predetermined variation mode as the variation mode when the variation display is executed,
The predetermined determination information includes determination information corresponding to the specific variation pattern and determination information corresponding to a non-specific variation pattern different from the specific variation pattern,
The determination information corresponding to the specific variation pattern is specific determination information that is the same regardless of the number of reserved information stored when the variation display is started,
The determination information corresponding to the non-specific variation pattern is determination information that differs depending on the number of stored pending information when the variation display is started,
The determination means is capable of determining whether the variation pattern of the variation display becomes the specific variation pattern by determining whether the variation pattern determination information acquired by the acquisition means matches the specific determination information,
The non-specific variation pattern includes a variation pattern in which a variation time from the start to the end of the variation display is shorter than that of the specific variation pattern,
The gist of the present invention is that, when the specified variation mode is set and the judgment means judges that the specific variation pattern will be obtained, the performance execution means is capable of executing a specific performance as the specified performance before the start of the variation display that is the subject of the judgment.

According to such a gaming machine, in a predetermined variation mode, when the variation pattern of the variation display is determined to be a specific variation pattern in the judgment by the judgment means performed before the determination of the variation pattern by the variation pattern determination means (determination of the variation pattern when the variation display is started), a specific performance is configured to be executed before the start of the variation display that is the subject of the judgment. The variation pattern determined when the variation display is started is determined based on the result of the determination by the special game determination means, the number of reserved information stored when the variation display is started (so-called "reserved number"), the variation pattern determination information acquired by the acquisition means, and the predetermined judgment information. The judgment information used in the determination includes judgment information corresponding to the specific variation pattern and judgment information corresponding to a non-specific variation pattern different from the specific variation pattern. The judgment information corresponding to the specific variation pattern is specific judgment information that is the same regardless of the reserved number when the variation display is started, and the judgment information corresponding to the non-specific variation pattern is judgment information that differs depending on the reserved number when the variation display is started. Therefore, in the predetermined variation mode, it is possible to prevent inconsistency between the specific performance executed for the specific variation pattern and the variation pattern (specific variation pattern) determined at the start of the variation. Additionally, non-specific fluctuation patterns can be adjusted according to the number of reserved items.

Furthermore, the non-specific fluctuation pattern includes a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time from the start to the end of the fluctuation display is shorter than that of the specific fluctuation pattern. This makes it possible to improve the efficiency of the fluctuation display.

As a result of the above, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 can effectively present the changing display of the identification information, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 described above,
The gist of the invention is that when the specified variation mode is set, the execution of the specific performance is restricted by storing the pending information in which the variation pattern of the variation display becomes the non-specific variation pattern.

According to such a gaming machine, the execution of a specific effect is restricted by storing pending information (i.e., fluctuation pattern determination information) in which the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display determined by the fluctuation pattern determination means is a non-specific fluctuation pattern. This makes it possible to foster a sense of expectation and trust in the specific effect when the specific effect is executed. This makes it possible to further enhance the effect of the effect.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 2-1 or 2-2 described above,
The results of the determination by the special game determination means include a first result of controlling the game to the special game state and a second result of not controlling the game to the special game state;
The gist of the invention is that the specific variation pattern and the non-specific variation pattern are variation patterns that are determined when the result of the determination by the special game determination means is the second result.

With such a gaming machine, the specific variation pattern and the non-specific variation pattern are variation patterns that are determined when the machine is not controlled to the special gaming state. This makes it possible to appropriately present a variation display that does not trigger control to the special gaming state. This makes it possible to enhance the presentation effect when the machine is not controlled to the special gaming state.

According to the above-mentioned reference invention 2, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

(Reference Invention 3)
Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that performs a variable display of identification information, and when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result, the gaming machine is controlled to enter a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In this type of gaming machine, a pre-determination is performed regarding a variable pattern or a display result related to the variable display of identification information, and a performance is performed based on the result of the pre-determination. The performance based on the result of the pre-determination is generally executed as a performance that foretells (suggests) the future development of the game, such as the possibility that the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result or the possibility of transitioning to a special gaming state (for example, see JP 2015-62623 A).

Presentation based on the results of advance judgment is now used in most gaming machines and plays an important role in increasing interest in playing. Therefore, if the reliability of presentation based on the results of advance judgment is compromised, there is a risk that interest in playing will decrease.

Reference Invention 3 was made in consideration of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

To solve the above problems, the present invention 3 adopts the following measures.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 is as follows:
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display of identification information,
A game control means capable of controlling the progress of a game;
A performance control means capable of controlling the execution of a performance based on information transmitted from the game control means,
The game control means includes:
An acquisition means capable of acquiring variation pattern determination information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A storage means capable of storing the variation pattern determination information acquired by the acquisition means as reserved information;
A variation pattern determination means capable of determining the variation pattern of the variation display to be one of a plurality of variation patterns based on the variation pattern determination information acquired by the acquisition means;
A determination means capable of determining which of the plurality of variation patterns the variation pattern of the variation display will be before the determination by the variation pattern determination means;
and an information transmitting means for transmitting, based on the fact that the reserved information has been stored, storage information relating to the number of stored reserved information and determination result information relating to the result of the determination by the determining means,
The performance control means includes:
A predetermined performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined performance based on the judgment result information;
The gist of the invention is that it includes a predetermined performance restriction means that, when there is an abnormality in at least one of the memory information and the judgment result information, is capable of restricting the execution of the predetermined performance until a predetermined restriction release condition is met.

According to such a gaming machine, the variation pattern of the variation display of the identification information is determined to be one of a plurality of variation patterns based on the variation pattern determination information acquired based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition (variation pattern determination means). When the variation pattern determination information is stored as reserved information, storage information regarding the number of reserved information stored (so-called "reserved number") and judgment result information regarding the result of the judgment by the judgment means are transmitted from the gaming control means to the presentation control means, and a predetermined presentation can be executed based on the judgment result information. Here, prior to the determination of the variation pattern by the variation pattern determination means, it is determined which of the plurality of variation patterns the variation pattern of the variation display will be (judgment means). Therefore, the predetermined presentation based on the judgment result information is a presentation that is performed in advance for the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination means.

With this configuration, if there is an abnormality in at least one of the stored information and the judgment result information sent from the game control means to the presentation control means (received by the presentation control means), the execution of the specified presentation is restricted until a specified restriction release condition is met. This makes it possible to prevent presentations that may mislead players from being performed. This makes it possible to avoid compromising the reliability of the specified presentation and suppress a decline in interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-1 described above,
The performance control means includes:
When a predetermined mode is set as a mode when the variable display is executed, if the variable display pattern specified based on the judgment result information is a specific variable pattern, a specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance before the start of the variable display based on the specific variable pattern;
The gist of the invention is that, when the specified mode is set and the fluctuation pattern of the variable display specified based on the judgment result information is a non-specific fluctuation pattern different from the specified fluctuation pattern, the invention includes a specific performance restriction means capable of restricting the execution of the specific performance until a specified restriction release condition is met.

According to such a gaming machine, in a specified mode, when the change pattern of the change display specified based on the judgment result information is a specific change pattern, that is, when pending information that triggers the execution of the change display based on the specific change pattern is stored, the specific performance can be executed before the start of the change display based on the specific change pattern. On the other hand, in a specified mode, when the change pattern of the change display specified based on the judgment result information is not a specific change pattern but a non-specific change pattern, that is, when pending information that triggers the execution of the change display based on the non-specific change pattern is stored, the execution of the specific performance is restricted until a specified restriction release condition is met. Therefore, in a specified mode, it is possible to foster a sense of expectation and trust for the performance (specific performance) when the specific performance is executed. This makes it possible to enhance the performance effect of the specific performance.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 described above,
The variation pattern determination means is capable of determining a variation pattern of the variation display based on the number of stored pending information at the time of starting the variation display, the variation pattern determination information acquired by the acquisition means, and predetermined judgment information, when starting the variation display;
The predetermined determination information includes determination information corresponding to the specific variation pattern,
The determination information corresponding to the specific variation pattern is specific determination information that is the same regardless of the number of reserved information stored when the variation display is started,
The gist of the invention is that the determination means is capable of determining whether the variation pattern of the variation display becomes the specific variation pattern by determining whether the variation pattern determination information acquired by the acquisition means matches the specific determination information.

According to such a gaming machine, the variation pattern determined when the variation display of the identification information starts is determined based on the number of reserved information stored (reserved number) when the variation display starts, the variation pattern determination information acquired by the acquisition means, and the predetermined judgment information. The judgment information used in the determination includes judgment information corresponding to the specific variation pattern. The judgment information corresponding to the specific variation pattern is specific judgment information that is the same regardless of the reserved number when the variation display starts. Then, in the judgment by the judgment means performed before the determination of the variation pattern by the variation pattern determination means (determination of the variation pattern when the variation display starts), it is determined whether the variation pattern of the variation display becomes a specific variation pattern by determining whether the acquired variation pattern determination information matches the specific judgment information. Therefore, in the predetermined mode, it is possible to prevent inconsistency between the specific performance executed for the specific variation pattern and the variation pattern (specific variation pattern) determined at the start of the variation. This makes it possible to avoid compromising the reliability of the specific performance.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-4 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 3-2 or 3 described above,
the game control means includes a special game execution means for executing a special game advantageous to a player based on a specific display result being derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display;
The gist of the invention is that the specific variation pattern and the non-specific variation pattern are variation patterns that are determined when the specific display result is not derived and displayed as the display result of the variation display.

According to such a gaming machine, the specific variation pattern and the non-specific variation pattern are variation patterns that are determined when a specific display result is not derived and displayed as a display result of the variation display of the identification information, that is, when the game is not controlled to a special game state. This makes it possible to appropriately perform presentation for a variation display in which a specific display result is not derived and displayed (a variation display that does not trigger control to a special game state). This makes it possible to enhance the presentation effect when a specific display result is not derived and displayed.

According to the above-mentioned reference invention 3, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

(Reference Invention 4)
Conventionally, there is known a gaming machine that performs a variable display of identification information, and when the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result, the gaming machine is controlled to enter a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In this type of gaming machine, a pre-determination is performed regarding a variable pattern or a display result related to the variable display of identification information, and a performance is performed based on the result of the pre-determination. The performance based on the result of the pre-determination is generally executed as a performance that foretells (suggests) the future development of the game, such as the possibility that the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result or the possibility of transitioning to a special gaming state (for example, see JP 2015-62623 A).

Performances based on the results of advance judgments are now used in most gaming machines, and the types and number of effects installed in each machine are on the rise. However, as the types and number of effects increase, the effects can become more complicated and difficult for players to understand, which could actually decrease interest in playing. Furthermore, performances based on the results of advance judgments play an important role in increasing interest in playing, and if the reliability of such effects is compromised, there is a risk that interest in playing will decrease.

Reference Invention 4 was made in consideration of the above circumstances, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

To solve the above problems, the present invention 4 adopts the following measures.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 is as follows:
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display of identification information,
A game control means capable of controlling the progress of a game;
A performance control means capable of controlling the execution of a performance based on information transmitted from the game control means,
The game control means includes:
An acquisition means capable of acquiring variation pattern determination information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A storage means capable of storing the variation pattern determination information acquired by the acquisition means as reserved information;
A variation pattern determination means for determining, when the variation display is started, the variation pattern of the variation display to be one of the plurality of variation patterns based on the number of stored pending information at the time of starting the variation display, the variation pattern determination information acquired by the acquisition means, and judgment information corresponding to the plurality of variation patterns;
A determination means capable of determining whether or not the variation pattern of the variation display is a specific variation pattern among the plurality of variation patterns before the determination by the variation pattern determination means;
and an information transmitting means for transmitting, based on the fact that the reserved information has been stored, storage information relating to the number of stored reserved information and determination result information relating to the result of the determination by the determining means,
The determination information corresponding to the plurality of fluctuation patterns includes determination information corresponding to the specific fluctuation pattern,
The determination information corresponding to the specific variation pattern is specific determination information that is the same regardless of the number of reserved information stored when the variation display is started,
The determination means is capable of determining whether the variation pattern of the variation display becomes the specific variation pattern by determining whether the variation pattern determination information acquired by the acquisition means matches the specific determination information,
The performance control means includes:
When the variation pattern of the variation display identified based on the judgment result information is the specific variation pattern, a preview performance execution means capable of executing at least a part of the preview performances among a plurality of preview performances;
A first limiting means for limiting the execution of the preview performance until a predetermined limit release condition is satisfied when at least one of the storage information and the judgment result information has an abnormality;
The present invention also includes a second restriction means for restricting the execution of at least a part of the preview performance while the preview performance is being executed.

According to such a gaming machine, the fluctuation pattern determination information acquired based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition can be stored as pending information, and the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display of the identification information is determined to be one of multiple fluctuation patterns based on the number of pending information stored (so-called "reserved number") when the fluctuation display is started, the acquired fluctuation pattern determination information, and the judgment information corresponding to the multiple fluctuation patterns (fluctuation pattern determination means). When the pending information (fluctuation pattern determination information) is stored, storage information on the number of pending information stored (reserved number) and judgment result information on the result of the judgment by the judgment means are transmitted from the gaming control means to the performance control means, and if the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display identified based on the judgment result information is a specific fluctuation pattern, at least some of the preview performances out of the multiple preview performances can be executed.

Here, before the determination of the variation pattern by the variation pattern determination means, it is determined whether the variation pattern of the variation display becomes a specific variation pattern (determination means). Therefore, the advance notice performance executed when the variation pattern of the variation display specified based on the determination result information is a specific variation pattern is a performance executed in advance that the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination means becomes a specific variation pattern. In addition, the determination information used in the determination of the variation pattern by the variation pattern determination means includes determination information corresponding to the specific variation pattern. The determination information corresponding to the specific variation pattern is specific determination information that is the same regardless of the number of reserved items when the variation display starts. Then, in the determination by the determination means executed before the determination of the variation pattern by the variation pattern determination means (determination of the variation pattern when the variation display starts), it is determined whether the variation pattern of the variation display becomes a specific variation pattern by determining whether the acquired variation pattern determination information matches the specific determination information. Therefore, when the variation pattern specified based on the determination result information is a specific variation pattern, it is possible to prevent inconsistency between the advance notice performance executed for the specific variation pattern and the variation pattern (specific variation pattern) determined at the start of the variation, thereby avoiding the reliability of the advance notice performance being impaired.

Furthermore, if there is an abnormality in at least one of the stored information and the judgment result information sent from the game control means to the presentation control means (received by the presentation control means), the execution of a specified presentation is restricted until a specified restriction release condition is met (first restriction means). This makes it possible to prevent a presentation that may mislead the player from being performed, and to avoid undermining the reliability of the preview presentation. Furthermore, while a preview presentation is being performed, the execution of at least some new preview presentations is restricted (second restriction means). This makes it possible to prevent overlapping presentations.

As a result of the above, the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 can effectively perform advance notices regarding the changing display of identification information, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-2 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 described above,
The performance control means includes a pre-notice performance execution means capable of executing at least a part of the pre-notice performances among the plurality of pre-notice performances before the execution of the pre-notice performance,
The pre-notice performance execution means may execute a first pre-notice performance or a second pre-notice performance among the plurality of pre-notice performances,
The preview performance execution means includes:
When the first preview performance is executed, a first preview performance among the plurality of preview performances can be executed after the first preview performance;
The gist of the invention is that when the second pre-preview performance is executed, a second pre-preview performance among the multiple pre-preview performances can be executed after the second pre-preview performance.

With such a gaming machine, before a preview performance is executed for a specific variation pattern, a first pre-notice performance or a second pre-notice performance may be executed. When the first pre-notice performance is executed, the preview performance executed for the specific variation pattern will be the first pre-notice performance, and when the second pre-notice performance is executed, the preview performance executed for the specific variation pattern will be the second pre-notice performance. As a result, the pre-notice performance becomes a performance that suggests in advance the execution of a preview performance, and it is possible to suggest the type of preview performance that will be executed through that pre-notice performance. This makes it possible to increase the player's interest in the preview performance.

The gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-3 is the gaming machine of Reference Invention 4-1 or 4-2 described above,
The performance control means includes:
A variable performance execution means capable of executing at least a part of the variable performances among a plurality of variable performances during the execution of the variable display;
and a variable performance change means for changing the variable performance that can be executed by the variable performance execution means based on the establishment of a predetermined change condition.

With this type of gaming machine, at least some of the multiple in-flight effects can be executed while the identification information is being displayed. When a specified change condition is met, the executable in-flight effects are changed. This makes it possible to vary the effects executed during the display of the changes. This makes it possible to prevent players from becoming bored.

According to the above-mentioned reference invention 4, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 Game board, 3 Game area, 4 Rail member, 7 Image display device, 7a Display screen, 7b Performance pattern display area, 7c Judgment pattern display area, 8 Performance pattern, 8s Judgment pattern, 9a First performance hold, 9b Second performance hold, 9c First performance hold display area, 9d Second performance hold display area, 9e Variable hold display area, 10 Center decoration, 13 Decoration member, 14 Movable performance member, 15 Movable lamp, 16 Game nail, 19 Fixed winning device, 20 First start hole, 21 Second start hole, 22 Variable winning device, 28 Gate, 30 Large winning hole, 31 Large winning device, 40 Main display, 41a First special pattern display, 41b Second special pattern display, 50 Game machine frame, 51 Front frame, 52 Main frame, 53 Outer frame, 60 Launch handle, 63a first effect button, 63b second effect button, 66 frame lamp, 67 speaker, 80 main control board, 81 game control microcomputer, 90 sub control board, 91 effect control microcomputer, 100 image control board, 101 image control microcomputer, 106 sound control board, 107 lamp control board, 701 caption image, 702 caption image, 703 caption image, 710 effect image (sliding door image), 711 effect image (shutter image), 712 effect image (blackout image), 721 standby image, 722 standby image, 730 effect image (first operation promotion image), 731 effect image (second operation promotion image).

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to a special gaming state that is advantageous to a player,
A special game determination means capable of determining whether or not to control to the special game state;
A variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display of identification information;
An acquisition means capable of acquiring variation pattern determination information based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A storage means capable of storing the variation pattern determination information acquired by the acquisition means as reserved information;
a variation pattern determining means for determining a variation pattern of the variation display from among a plurality of predetermined variation patterns based on a result of the determination by the special game determining means, the number of stored reserved information when the variation display is started, variation pattern determining information acquired by the acquiring means, and predetermined judgment information when the variation display is started;
A determination means capable of determining a variation pattern of the variation display before the determination by the variation pattern determination means;
a performance execution means for executing a predetermined performance based on a result of the determination by the determination means;
A variation mode setting means for setting a predetermined variation mode as the variation mode when the variation display is executed;
A display means having a display screen,
The predetermined determination information includes determination information corresponding to a specific variation pattern among the plurality of variation patterns, and determination information corresponding to a non-specific variation pattern different from the specific variation pattern among the plurality of variation patterns,
The determination information corresponding to the specific variation pattern is specific determination information that is the same regardless of the number of reserved information stored when the variation display is started,
The determination information corresponding to the non-specific variation pattern is determination information that differs depending on the number of stored pending information when the variation display is started,
The determination means is capable of determining whether the variation pattern of the variation display becomes the specific variation pattern by determining whether the variation pattern determination information acquired by the acquisition means matches the specific determination information,
The non-specific variation pattern includes a variation pattern in which a variation time from the start to the end of the variation display is shorter than that of the specific variation pattern,
The display screen is provided with a memory display section capable of displaying a memory display corresponding to the hold information stored in the storage means, and a variable memory display section capable of displaying a variable memory display corresponding to the variable display being executed,
When the predetermined variation mode is set and the determination means determines that the specific variation pattern is to be set, the performance execution means is capable of executing a specific performance as the predetermined performance based on a specific performance pattern different from the variation pattern of the variation display from before the start of the target variation display that is the subject of the determination to a predetermined period of time after the start of the target variation display that is the subject of the determination ,
The specific performance is executed by displaying a specific performance image based on the specific performance pattern on the display screen, and before the start of the target change display, while a memory display corresponding to the pending information corresponding to the target change display is displayed on the memory display unit, the specific performance image is displayed in a manner suggesting the storage of the pending information whose change pattern becomes the specific change pattern, and when a change memory display corresponding to the target change display is displayed on the change memory display unit with the start of the target change display, the specific performance image is displayed in a manner suggesting the consumption of the pending information whose change pattern becomes the specific change pattern.

Images